TET-DG-5000 - Integrated Water Supply System - v1.0

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 192

Design Guideline

Integrated Water Supply System


TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1
DOCUMENT CONTROL 8
FOREWORD 9
ABBREVIATIONS 11
DEFINITIONS 14
REFERENCE STANDARDS 17
CHAPTER 1 BASIC DESIGN CRITERIA 19
1.1 Introduction 20
1.2 Water Demand Forecast 20
1.2.1 Population forecast 20
1.2.2 Categories of water demand 21
1.2.3 Headroom 26
1.2.4 Peak factors in distribution system 26
1.3 Water Transmission and Distribution Networks 28
1.3.1 Future water demand – Design horizon and phasing of assets 28
1.3.2 Desired pressure 29
1.3.3 Velocity 30
1.3.4 Route and elevation 30
1.3.5 Surge 31
1.3.6 Valves 31
1.3.7 Pipe materials 31
1.3.8 Energy considerations 32
1.4 Water Quality 32
1.5 Control Philosophy 32
1.5.1 Simple transmission pipeline to a demand area 32
1.5.2 Transmission pipeline into storage 32
1.5.3 Transmission pipeline to the suction of a booster 33
1.6 Security of Supply – Risk Management 33
1.7 Hydraulic Model Simulation 34
1.7.1 Input data collection 34
1.7.2 General 34
1.7.3 Water demand 34
1.7.4 Network layout 35
1.7.5 Model building 35
1.7.6 Arriving Optimum Solutions 36
1.7.7 Model Testing 36
1.7.8 Record keeping 36
1.7.9 Submission to Diam 37
1.7.10 Integration with geographic information systems (GIS) 37

CHAPTER 2 WELLS AND ACCESSORIES 38


2.1 Water Sources 39
2.2 Groundwater Identification 39
2.2.1 Hydrogeology 39
2.2.2 Surface geophysics 40

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 1 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
2.2.3 Subsurface geophysics 40
2.2.4 Well site location 40
2.3 Well Drilling 41
2.3.1 Drilling techniques 41
2.3.2 Drilling procedure 41
2.4 Well Casing and Screen 42
2.4.1 Physical and chemical qualities of casing and screen materials 43
2.5 Well Development 44
2.6 Pumping Test 45
2.6.1 Step-drawdown test 46
2.6.2 Constant discharge test 48
2.6.3 General protocol to maintain during monitoring pump tests 48
2.7 Methods to Measure Discharge 48
2.8 Downhole Video Logging 49
2.9 Well Head Facilities 49
2.10 Well Disinfection 49
2.11 Well Head Platform and Accessories 49
2.12 Pumping System 50
2.13 Instrumentation 50
2.14 Well Completion Report 51
2.15 Regulation for The Protection of The Ground Water 51
CHAPTER 3 DESALINATION BY REVERSE OSMOSIS 53
3.1 Introduction 54
3.2 General Requirements 54
3.2.1 Principle of reverse osmosis 54
3.2.2 Sea water reverse osmosis plants 55
3.2.3 Different stages in RO treatment system 56
3.3 Raw Water Source and Quality 56
3.4 Sea Water Intake and Sea Water Outfall 57
3.5 Pre-treatment 57
3.6 Pressurization and Energy Recovery 57
3.7 Pre-treatment Design 58
3.7.1 Pre-treatment performance 58
3.7.2 Pre-treatment processes 58
3.7.3 Chemical conditioning before RO 59
3.8 RO Stage Design 60
3.8.1 General layout 60
3.8.2 Main process parameters 61
3.8.3 Energy recovery device 62
3.8.4 Cleaning in Place (CIP) 62
3.9 Post Treatment Design 63
3.9.1 Final disinfection 63
3.9.2 Remineralisation and correction of pH 63
3.10 Chemicals Handling, Storage, Preparation and Dosing 64
3.11 Chemical Waste Disposal 65
3.12 Instrumentation and Control 65

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 2 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
CHAPTER 4 PUMPING STATION 67
4.1 Introduction 68
4.1.1 Basis of design report drawings 69
4.1.2 Design specifications 69
4.1.3 Design drawings 69
4.1.4 Future expansion/upgradation 69
4.1.5 Phasing of pump station design 69
4.2 Design of Pumping Station 70
4.2.1 General recommendations 70
4.2.2 Pump station types 71
4.2.3 Components of pump station 71
4.2.4 Site infrastructure 72
4.2.5 Access road 74
4.2.6 Access and protection 74
4.2.7 Materials of construction 74
4.2.8 Pump station building 75
4.2.9 Access and maintenance 75
4.2.10 Overhead hoist 75
4.2.11 Hydraulic equipment & instrumentation 75
4.2.12 Pipework arrangement and valving 77
4.2.13 Disinfection 79
4.2.14 HVAC system 79
4.2.15 SCADA 80
4.2.16 Electrical equipment 81
4.2.17 Emergency power 81
4.2.18 Fire protection 81
4.2.19 Health, safety and environmental requirements 82
4.2.20 Other facilities 84
4.3 Hydraulic Calculations for Pump 85
4.3.1 Pump design parameters 85
4.3.2 Operating point 85
4.3.3 NPSH and cavitation 86
4.3.4 Hydraulic transient 86
4.4 Pump Design 86
4.4.1 Pump selection 87
4.4.2 Field of use 87
4.4.3 Shaft position 87
4.4.4 Number of impeller(s) 88
4.4.5 Type of impeller 88
4.4.6 Type of casing 88
4.4.7 Number of suction ports 88
4.4.8 Specific speed 89
4.5 Components of Pump 89
4.5.1 Motor 89
4.5.2 Impeller 89
4.5.3 Casing 90
4.5.4 Shaft 90
4.5.5 Seals 90
4.5.6 Coupling 90
4.5.7 Bearings 91
4.5.8 Suction pipe 91
4.5.9 Foot valve with strainer 91
4.5.10 Delivery pipe and delivery valve 92

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 3 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
4.6 Pump Performance Testing 92
4.6.1 Factory acceptance test (FAT) 92
4.6.2 Site acceptance test (SAT) 93

CHAPTER 5 POTABLE WATER RESERVOIRS 95


5.1 Reservoirs Aim and Objectives 96
5.2 Reservoirs Classifications 96
5.2.1 Location 96
5.2.2 Type 96
5.3 General Design Guidelines 97
5.3.1 Design alternatives 97
5.3.2 Design and demand considerations 97
5.3.3 Environmental requirements 98
5.3.4 Maintainability 98
5.3.5 Site allocation 98
5.3.6 Topographic survey 99
5.3.7 Soil investigation 99
5.3.8 Seismic considerations 100
5.3.9 Permits and approvals 100
5.3.10 Reservoirs foundation requirements 101
5.3.11 Reservoirs structural requirements 101
5.3.12 Reservoirs comparting and partitioning 102
5.3.13 Reservoirs testing 102
5.3.14 Reservoirs aesthetic requirements 102
5.3.15 Leak preventive system 103
5.3.16 Overflow site surface water drainage considerations 103
5.3.17 Spilling response plans considerations 103
5.3.18 Site accessibility considerations 103
5.3.19 Site security considerations 104
5.3.20 Water quality considerations 107
5.3.21 Ventilations requirements 110
5.3.22 Reservoirs access ladders 111
5.3.23 Inlet pipes chambers 112
5.3.24 Outlet pipes chambers 112
5.3.25 Overflow pipes 112
5.3.26 Strainers 112
5.3.27 Gate Valves 113
5.3.28 Butterfly Valves (Manual/Motorized) 113
5.3.29 Meters 113
5.3.30 Dismantling Joints 113
5.3.31 Reservoirs site power supply 113
5.3.32 Reservoir site lighting 113
5.3.33 Instrumentations 113
5.3.34 SCADA control 114

CHAPTER 6 TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION PIPELINES 116


6.1 General 117
6.1.1 Definitions of various pipelines 117
6.1.2 Sizing 117
6.1.3 Pipe alignment and installation 117
6.1.4 Pipeline and broadband duct 119
6.1.5 Identification of pipeline 119
6.1.6 Pipe laying techniques 119

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 4 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
6.1.7 Accessibility 119
6.1.8 Materials 120
6.1.9 Pipeline connection 121
6.1.10 Self-anchored joints 121
6.1.11 Anchor (Thrust) blocks 122
6.1.12 Joints 122
6.1.13 Valves 122
6.1.14 Metering 124
6.1.15 Fire hydrants 124
6.1.16 Network protection 125
6.2 Accessories 125
6.2.1 Nuts, Bolts and Washers 125
6.2.2 Gaskets and joint rings 125
6.3 Pipe Storage 126
6.4 Hydraulic Calculation 126
6.4.1 Hydraulic thrust 126
6.4.2 Water hammer (Surge) 126
6.5 Pipe Installation 127
6.5.1 Excavation 127
6.5.2 Trench width 129
6.5.3 Trench depth 129
6.5.4 Safety in excavations 130
6.5.5 Trench safety 130
6.5.6 Pipe bed 130
6.5.7 Pipe laying 131
6.5.8 Backfilling 132
6.6 Road and Wadi Crossings 133
6.6.1 Road crossings 133
6.6.2 Crossing through existing ducts / culverts 134
6.6.3 Wadi crossings 134
6.6.4 Valve Chambers and Surface Boxes 135
6.7 Hydraulic Testing 136
6.8 Disinfection and Flushing 137
6.9 Design of Water Transmission Pipelines 137
6.9.1 Valves on transmission system 137
6.10 Design of Water Distribution Pipelines 138
6.10.1 Pipe size 139
6.10.2 Pressure 140
6.10.3 Methods of supplying potable water 140
6.10.4 Water flowmeters 144
6.10.5 Leakage and wastage control 144
6.11 SCADA 146
CHAPTER 7 CATHODIC PROTECTION 147
7.1 Introduction 148
7.2 Cathodic Protection System 148
7.2.1 Methods of applying CP 148
7.2.2 Sacrificial (Galvanic) anodes CP 148
7.2.3 Impressed current CP 149
7.3 General Requirements 150
7.4 Basic Design Data/ Guidelines 151

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 5 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
7.4.1 Test station 152
7.4.2 Reference electrodes 152
7.5 Functional Guarantee 153
7.6 Documentation 153

CHAPTER 8 PIPELINE INTRUSION, LEAK DETECTION AND LOCATING


SYSTEM USING FIBER OPTIC CABLES 155
8.1 Introduction 156
8.2 General Requirements 157
8.2.1 PID / LDS system 158
8.2.2 PID/LDS technology 158
8.2.3 PID / LDS sensing cables 159
8.2.4 Integrator unit 159
8.2.5 Processor unit 159
8.2.6 CONTROL UNIT 159
8.3 Leak Detection Technology 160
8.4 Data Recording 160
8.4.1 Digital recorder 160
8.4.2 Manual recording 160
8.5 System Integration 160
8.5.1 Mobile communications 161
8.5.2 Dry contacts 161
8.5.3 SCADA/PLC inter-operability 161
8.6 System Software Alert Modules 161
8.7 Software Modules 162
8.8 User Level Access 164
8.9 Web Services 164
8.10 System Control & Feedback 165
8.11 PID / LDS Performance Criteria 165
8.12 Licenses 166
8.13 Inspection and Testing 166
8.14 Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT) 167
8.15 Site Acceptance Tests (SAT) 168
8.16 Installation 168
8.17 Operating Capability 168
8.17.1 Pre-operating capability 168
8.17.2 Final operating capability 169
8.18 Commissioning 169
8.19 Training 170
CHAPTER 9 DISINFECTION 171
9.1 Chlorine Disinfection 172
9.2 Secondary Chlorination Requirements 173
9.2.1 Water quality standard and risks 173
9.2.2 Disinfection System and Agents 174
9.3 Residual Chlorine Measurement and Monitoring 176
9.3.1 Regulation/control of dosage flow 176
9.3.2 Type of measurement 178
9.4 Monitoring of Chlorine Levels and Alarms in SCADA 179

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 6 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
9.5 HSE Guidelines on Chlorination Units 179
9.5.1 HAZOP study 179
9.5.2 Risk assessment 180
9.6 Documentation 180

CHAPTER 10 SERVICE CONNECTIONS 182


10.1 Purpose 183
10.2 Scope and Application 183
10.3 Definitions 183
10.4 Existing Arrangements 183
10.5 Quality of Installations 183
10.6 Service Pipe Location and Requirements 184
10.7 Ground Tank Storage – General Requirements 185
10.7.1 Tank placement and location 185
10.7.2 Fittings and accessories of the storage tank 185
10.8 One Connection Per Premise 186
10.9 Water Meter Provision 186
10.10 Cross Connection Control 186
10.11 Illegal Tapings 187

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 7 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
DOCUMENT CONTROL

General Information

This document is the property of Public Authority for Water (Diam). Neither the whole nor any part of this document may be
published, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or disclosed and/or transmitted to others in any form or by any means
(electronic, hard copy, reprographic or otherwise) without prior written consent of Diam-QHSE Head.

Date Version Prepared By Reviewed By Approved By

Civil and Networks Senior Manager


Expert Technical Supports and General Manager
April 2020 1.0 Senior Engineer Tools Planning and Asset
Executive Civil and Manager Technical
Management
Networks Supports and Standards

History of modification

Version Details

1.0 - Compiled Document after upgrading all previous design guidelines.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 8 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
FOREWORD

Diam, as governmental entity, is responsible for providing potable water to customers according
to the international standards. This design guideline for potable water integral system is prepared in
compliance with Diams’ general policy to provide safe production, storage and distribution systems
to ensure best and efficient water utilities performance, at highest quality and environmental (local
and international) standards.

This technical guideline is not supposed to substitute or relieve any engineering judgment made
by the designer who will presumably perform to ultimate responsibility for selection, reference and
appropriate application.

This guideline provides a masterpiece of information for the engineering professionals and to be
used for planning, design and construction of potable water integral system consisting of ten chapters
as following:

CHAPTER 1 BASIC DESIGN CRITERIA


CHAPTER 2 WELLS AND ACCESSORIES
CHAPTER 3 DESALINATION BY REVERSE OSMOSIS
CHAPTER 4 PUMPING STATION
CHAPTER 5 POTABLE WATER RESERVOIRS
CHAPTER 6 TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION PIPELINES
CHAPTER 7 CATHODIC PROTECTION
CHAPTER 8 PIPELINE INTRUSION, LEAK DETECTION AND LOCATING SYSTEM
USING FIBER OPTIC CABLES
CHAPTER 9 DISINFECTION
CHAPTER 10 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

The objective of this document is to standardise and reduce the variability in designs undertaken
on behalf of Diam. The designer to consider this document to be applicable in the majority of
situations and shall read in conjunction with other Diam standards, specifications and drawings or
any other document published to replace whole or parts of this document. The intended design
lifetime shall be 25 years for all kind of assets, unless otherwise stated.

In principle, the designer to consider the design guidelines objectives to cover the following
criteria:

 Ensure fitness for purpose;


 Ensure ease of constructability;

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 9 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 Ensure functional and durable system;
 Ensure ease of maintenance;
 Ensure reliable operation;
 Ensure water quality is not degraded;
 Minimise adverse environmental and community impact;
 Comply with environmental requirements;
 Comply with operational health and safety requirements;
 Minimise energy consumption by efficient operation;
 Achieve extended service life with minimal maintenance and least whole of life cost;
 Provide adequate weather protection and storm water management;
 Provide sufficient vehicular and personnel access for maintenance.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 10 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
ABBREVIATIONS

AER Authority for Electricity Regulation


ASR Alkali Silica Reaction
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ARI Average Recurrence Interval
ATEX Atmospheric Explosible
AV Air Valve
AWWA American Water Works Association
BA Breathing Apparatus
BS British Standard
CAPEX Capital Expenditure
CCR Central Control Room
CFD Computational Fluid Dynamics
CIP Cleaning in Place
CLS Chlorine System
COSHH Control of Substances Hazardous to Health
CS Carbon Steel
CT Contact Time
DFT Dry Film Thickness
DG Design Guidelines
DI Ductile Iron
Diam Public Authority for Water
DMA District Metering Area
DN Nominal Diameter
DWI Drinking Water Inspectorate
EBA Escape Breathing Apparatus
EMC Executive Management Committee
EPDM Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer
ERD Energy Recovery Device
ERI Energy Rating Index
ESR Elevated Service Reservoir
FDS Functional Design Specification
FM Flowmeter
GBR Ground Balancing Reservoir
GI Galvanized Iron
GIS Geographic Information System
GPS Global Positioning System
GRE Glass Reinforced Epoxy
GRP Glass Reinforced Plastic
GSR Ground Service Reservoir
H Pump Head
HAUC Highway Authorities and Utilities Committee
HAZOP Hazard and Operability Study

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 11 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
HMI Human Machine Interface
HSE Health, Safety and Environment
HV/MV/LV High, Medium, Low Voltage
HVAC Heat, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
ISO International Organization for Standardization
IWA International Water Association
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LT Level Transmitter
MECA Ministry of Environment and Climate Affairs
MOH Ministry of Housing
MoT Ministry of Transport
MOV Motor Operated Valve
MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet
MSF Multi Stage Desalination
mwc Meter Water Column
NCSI National Centre for Statistics and Information
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NPSH Net Positive Suction Head
NPV Net Present Value
NRSWA New Road and Street Works Act
NRV Non-return Valve
NSF National Sanitation Foundation
O&M Operation and Maintenance
OBC Oman Broadband Company
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
OPEX Operational Expenditure
PACDA Public Authority for Civil Defense and Ambulance
PCR Pre-stressed Concrete Reservoir
PE Polyethylene
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
PPE Personal Protective Equipment
PRV Pressure Reducer Valve
PW Potable Water
PX Pressure Exchanger
Q Flow Capacity
RCC Reinforced Cement Concrete
RCl Residual Chlorine
RCR Reinforced Concrete Reservoir
RO Reverse Osmosis
ROP Royal Oman Police
RTU Remote Terminal Unit
SAT Site Acceptance test
SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
SCBA Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 12 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
SD Standard Drawing
SFR Surge Feed Reservoir
SRC Sulphate Resistant Cement
SS Stainless Steel
SWRO Sea Water Reverse Osmosis
TDS Total Dissolved Solids
TET Technical Expertise and Tools
TFS Tanker Filling Station
THM Trihalomethane
TOR Terms of Reference
UGR Under Ground Reservoir
VFD Variable Frequency Drive
WHO World Health Organization
WRAS Water Regulations Advisory Schemes

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 13 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
DEFINITIONS

Applicant a person who is of a communal service

Approval approval in writing or stamping document(s) by Diam

Back Flow the flow in a direction contrary to the intended normal direction of flow

Charge any charge for water or services or works carried out directly by Diam, this is
payable in the form of deposit or fees bylaws

Client refers to Public Authority for Water (Diam) that owning the profession of water
distribution
Closed Loop any system of pipes/fittings through which the water circulates in confined
networks where water is drawn to feed or supply water
Corrosion any material, which is highly resistant to corrosion action that is likely and
Resisting subjected to corrosion circumstances
Material
Customer any person or corporation applying for water supply from Diam. Reference to
"Customer" in these bylaws shall fill the required documents

Designer a person from the side of client or consultant or adviser who plans the look or
workings of water network(s)/ancillaries prior to it being made
Distribution designated pipeline in the networks to distribute water for the use of premises
network through the service connection
Domestic water system that includes the distributing pipe and all associated apparatus
System within premises up to the point where water been drawn for customer use
Durability the ability of water network and its associated ancillaries to withstand wear,
pressure, or damage over designated period
Elevated tank water storage container made for a purpose of delivering water to end used within
the desired parameters
Engineer a person from the side of client or consultant or adviser who designs, builds, or
maintains engines, machines, or structures
Fire Service the pipes, tanks, pumps, fittings, and apparatus in any premises installed
specifically for firefighting application
Float Valve allocated valve for controlling the flow of water into a cistern, its operation
controlled by vertical movement of a float riding on the surface of the water
Header the pipe conveying water from the upper stream supplying the corresponding
branches
Inside Service the pipes and fittings in premises after the ground storage tank and any pipes
and fittings between the storage tanks and the termination of the water network
service connection, which shall normally be at the meter
Internal a pipeline that conveys water from the main allocated storage to the individual
Network villa or buildings and other utilities inside the residential complex by the setoff
water pumps
Life cycle cost a method to determine the most cost-effective option among different competing
analysis alternatives to purchase, own, operate, maintain and dispose of an asset, when
each is equally appropriate to be implemented on technical grounds
Main Meter meter device allocated for measuring consumption for an allocated group of
premises on a specific distribution network or tanks serving a particular area

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 14 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Meter an appliance or device installed owned and maintained by Diam for measuring
consumption
Meter Cabinet box designed specifically for Diam use for installing a water meter device

Meter Chamber constructed underground chamber to accommodate electronic sensor


connected to the bulk meter cabinet by 2 inches conducts for the sensor cord to
the EDU (Electronic Display Unit)
Phasing a way to conduct a project in different stages based on available cash

Potable Water water supplied by Diam, which is suitable for drinking and culinary purposes

Premises any houses, building apartments, part of a house or building thereof in respect of
which water supplied or been applied for
Private Buildings where human living for the purpose of settling in the plant areas, where
Building building permits are issued
Public Governmental building and establishment (Non-Investment), a private
Buildings establishment for the general benefit, clubs, federations, and social housing
buildings
Pump duty the intersection between the pump performance curve and the system's
point characteristics
Renewable is a natural resource which will replenish to replace the portion depleted by usage
and consumption, either through natural reproduction or other recurring
processes in a finite amount of time in a human time scale
Reservoir A structure built to provide water balance for distribution network or/and pumping
stations during peak usage as well as to provide a reasonable undisturbed level
of service
Riser pipe that conveying water from downstream of booster pump up to the roof
tank(s) on the roof of the building
Scenario a written outline of a stage work giving details of the plot and individual scenes

Service part of pipes and fittings between the distribution main up to and including the
Connection water meter at the customer's boundary
Service Pipe pipe/arrangement of pipes for supplying water from a distribution main to any
premises as it is subject to water pressure from that water main and ends at the
water meter at the customer's boundary provide that only one pipe be connected
to the water meter
Sub Main pipe branches from the main water pipe to inside compound through which water
conveyed to the inside the complex, in case of complex composed of villa and
buildings
Sub Meters individual meters downstream of the main meter or sub main through which
conveyed water to flats or villa in building or complex
Surge a sudden powerful forward or upward movement

Sustainability the ability of a system to exist constantly at a cost, in a universe that evolves
towards thermodynamic equilibrium, the state with maximum entropy
System head a common type of tool used in pump selection and system design and sizing

Tank A container for storing liquids

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 15 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Transmission The water pipeline that interconnects source (desalination plant) and storage
reservoir(s); storage reservoir(s) and break pressure tank(s) normally without
direct consumer connections.
Water Booster set of pumps boosting water from the upper stream (low elevation) to
Pumps downstream (high elevation)
Water quality the condition of the water, including chemical, physical, and biological
characteristics, usually with respect to its suitability for a particular purpose such
as drinking
Water utility The water industry provides drinking water services to residential, commercial,
and industrial sectors of the economy

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 16 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
REFERENCE STANDARDS
Latest version of the following reference standard shall always be used.

Standard No. Description


API 5L Seamless and welded pipe

AS 1444 Wrought alloy steels standard, hardenability (H) series and hardened and
tempered to designated mechanical properties
AWWA C651  Disinfecting Water Mains

AWWA D100 Standard for Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage

AWWA D103  Factory-Coated Bolted Steel Tanks for Water Storage

AWWA D110 Wire- and Strand-Wound, Circular, Prestressed Concrete Water Tanks

AWWA E103  Horizontal and Vertical Line-Shaft Pumps

AWWA M11 Steel Pipe: A Guide for Design and Installation

AWWA M51 Air Valves: Air Release, Air/Vacuum, and Combination

BS 4449 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete

BS 6920 Suitability of non-metallic materials and products for use in contact with
water intended for human consumption with regard to their effect on the
quality of the water
BS EN 10088 Stainless steels. Technical delivery conditions for sheet/plate and strip of
corrosion resisting steels for general purposes
BS EN 13636 Cathodic protection of buried metallic tanks and related piping

BS EN 15112 External cathodic protection of well casing

BS EN 1992-1 Eurocode 2 - Design of Concrete Structures, General rules and rules for
buildings
BS EN 1992-3 Eurocode 2 - Design of Concrete Structures, Liquid retaining and
containing structures
BS EN 1997-7 Eurocode 7 Geotechnical Design - Part 7 Pile Foundations

fib Model Code 2010 fib Model Code for Concrete Structures

IEC 60529 Degree of protection provided by enclosure (IP Code)

ISO 10474 Steel and steel products - Inspection documents

ISO 10802 Ductile iron pipelines - Hydrostatic testing after installation

ISO 1940-1 Mechanical vibration - Balance quality requirements for rotors in a


constant (rigid) state - Part 1: Specification and verification of balance
tolerances
ISO 4064 Water meters for cold potable water and hot water

ISO 9906 Rotodynamic pumps - Hydraulic performance acceptance tests - Grades


1, 2 and 3

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 17 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
ITU-T G652 Characteristics of a single-mode optical fibre and cable

ITU-T G655 Characteristics of a non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode optical fibre


and cable
MD 286 Occupational health and safety framework

NRSWA 1991 New Road and Street Works Act 1991

NSF 60 Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals – Health Effects

OIML R 49 Water meters for cold potable water and hot water

OS 8 Unbottled Drinking Water English

PACDA Fire Safety Requirements (All Parts)

WHO – 2017 Guidelines for drinking - water Quality - 2017

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 18 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
CHAPTER 1 BASIC DESIGN CRITERIA

Chapter 1 describes the basic design requirements for a water supply system. In order to ensure

the fulfilment with the other design chapters, herein within this book, it shows the basis for water

demand calculations, technical requirements for transmission and distribution pipelines, water

quality, security of water supply and hydraulic simulation.

This chapter is a standalone chapter and shall be read in line with the requirements of other chapters within this

document “Integrated Water Supply System” as well as with the other publications by Diam e.g. manuals, standard

specifications and drawings.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 19 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
1.1 Introduction
This chapter has been prepared as a guide to Water Utility engineers and their consultants for the
planning of water transmission and distribution systems.

It is not intended as a complete Manual for pipe design, but is intended to:

1. Set out the Diam policy for network design


2. Inform upon standard pipeline design criteria
3. Provide basic pipeline requirements to ensure the safe operation of the network
4. Act as an aid memoire where specialist design skills are required e.g. surge.

In the event of any doubt concerning the use of this guide, the advice of Diam should be sought. It the
responsibility of the designer to seek/ask for clarification from Diam.

Wherever possible, the water demand of an area should be based upon researched data relating to the
specific area under study. Only where such data is not available, should the data in this guide be used.

The Guide provides the minimum requirements/standards to be met and the data provided is to be used
as the minimum acceptable.

This design guideline shall be used for normal cities in Oman. However, remote areas that are located
far away from cities and with limited number of occupancy shall be designed according the
TET/DG/5011, Basic Design Criteria for Remote Area.

1.2 Water Demand Forecast

1.2.1 Population forecast


1.2.1.1 Population
Future water domestic demand depends upon the future population and future per capita
consumption.
Population in an area can be determined in a number of ways:

1. As provided by a developer in his request for a water supply to be made available;


2. From the planning proposals of the Omani Planning Authorities;
3. Existing population added to growth rate;
4. Calculated (N×P×O) from the number of plots (N), properties per plot (P) and occupancy rates
(O); and
5. Using a population/acre figure.

1.2.1.2 Domestic occupancy

Domestic occupancy rates are difficult to ascertain due to lack of appropriate data. Computations are
complicated by the large number of empty houses1, holiday homes and for other reasons. The number
of occupancies shown in Table 1.1 have been obtained from 2010 census and, then updated in 2019

1 According to the 2010 Population Census of the total 551,058 housing units only 396,421 were occupied.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 20 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
based on the data provided by NCSI, can be used for future developments unless more explicit data is
available.

Designer shall conduct a local study for the proposed area (e.g. using satellite images) to account for
the plot sub-division, e.g. number of villas per plot. Unless otherwise stated by local municipality,
obtained ratio from the total number of dwelling over the original number of plots can be used to forecast
number of dwellings within the block.

Table 1.1. Domestic occupancy per governorate.

Governorate As assessed for 2019*

Muscat 5.1
Al Batinah (north & south) 6.0
Al Buraymi 5.0
Ad Dakhliyah 6.0
Adh Dhahirah 6.1
Ash Sharqiyah (north & south) 4.7
Al Wusta 7.6
Musandam 4.2

*Note that these figures have been obtained from 2010 census and, then updated in 2019 based on the data
provided by NCSI.

1.2.1.3 Future population and growth rates

Future population growth rate shall be obtained from the planners in Water Utility and shall be the
latest version, which is approved by Executive Management Committee (EMC).

1.2.2 Categories of water demand


For designing and planning a water transmission, the most important factor is to understand the water
requirement of the area to be supplied and the various categories of demand.

There is a distinct difference between water demand, which is the quantity of water required within an
area to satisfy all the water needs of the area, and water consumption, which is the actual quantity of
water drawn by customers through their service pipes.

In some cases, due to inadequacies in the water supply system, customers demand may not be met.
In which case, their consumption is referred to as “restrained demand”. However, water systems shall
be designed for unrestrained water demand considering the measured reflection from the terminologies
shown in Table 1.2.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 21 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Table 1.2. IWA Standard International Water Balance and Terminology.

Billed Metered Consumption


Billed
(including water exported)
Authorized Revenue Water
Consumption Billed Unmetered
Authorized Consumption
Consumption Unbilled Metered
Unbilled
Consumption
Authorized
System Input Unbilled Unmetered
Consumption
Volume Consumption
(Corrected for Apparent
Unauthorized Consumption
known errors) Losses
(Commercial Customer Metering
WATER losses) Inaccuracies* Non-Revenue
DEMAND Water Losses Leakage on Transmission and Water
/ or Distribution Mains
Unaccounted
Real Losses Leakage and Overflows at
for Water
(technical Utility’s Storage Tanks
losses) Leakage on Service
Connections up to point of
Customer Metering

* Should include data handling errors

For water demand forecast the following categories can be used:

 Domestic consumption by pipe supply


 Domestic consumption by tanker supply
 Non-domestic consumption
 Unaccounted for water including:
o Leakage and other technical losses
o Water used by Diam in its normal operations
o Firefighting usage
o Commercial losses

1.2.2.1 Domestic consumption by pipe supply

The required water demand of customers to be met by the Diam for their domestic use, i.e. within their
residences, varies depending on several considerations such as socio-economic, cultural and climatic.

Water consumption is expressed as “per capita consumption” and is the average quantity of water used
per capita per day is generally termed as “lpcd”.

Wherever data is available, domestic per capita demand should be based upon the consumption at the
time of the design, increased appropriately over the project design horizon, which is usually 25 years
for distribution networks and transmission pipelines. Noting that the design horizon of 25 years shall
exclude design and contracting period.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 22 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
The following data shown in Table 1.3 should be used as guidance:
Table 1.3. Average forecast for water domestic consumption supplied by pipe.

Parameter Governorate 2025 2030 2035 2040 2045+

Muscat 202 204 206 208 210


Al Batinah North 185 190 190 195 200
Al Batinah South 185 190 190 195 200
Domestic
Al Buraymi 183 185 190 192 194
consumption
Ad Dakhliyah 185 190 195 200 200
as drawn at
tap in Adh Dhahirah 170 175 180 182 184
Ash Sharqiyah
liters/head/day 165 165 170 175 180
(North and South)
Al Wusta 165 175 177 179 180
Musandam 191 193 195 197 200

These figures are apply across a governorate. It can be expected that there will be variations within a
governorate.

1.2.2.2 Domestic consumption by tankers supply

Where water is being distributed by the tankers, the consumption of 100 liters /capita/day is to be
used.
1.2.2.3 Non-domestic consumption

Where there is not expected to be any specific non-domestic high-usage, there are different methods
to calculate the water consumption, such as:

 Commercial user can be converted into the equivalent number of domestic users;
 Number of employees at the commercial site divided by the population density per house in the
region to get the equivalent number of properties;
 Hotels, clinics and hospitals can be converted into domestic properties by considering the
number of users so that in turn the usage can be calculated.

Generally, domestic usage uses the greatest volume of water per square meter of any other type of
user. Table 1.4 shows some values of non-domestic consumption for special uses.
Table 1.4. Average forecast for water non-domestic consumption supplied by pipe.

Category Average per Capita consumption


Public office 60 l / c/day (6 days per week)
Hospital 200 – 500 l / bed / day
School 20 l / pupil / day (5 days per week)
Hotel 200 – 500 l / person/day
Restaurant 100 l / person/day
Cattle breeding 6 -10 l/ animal/ day
Gardens / plantations 3 -10 l / m2 / day

A general “rule of thumb” is to allow 20% of the domestic consumption for non-domestic usage
(including government).

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 23 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Where there are known to be industrial premises that will have a high water consumption or other
developments such as tourist complexes, shopping malls, universities, hospitals, hotels and industrial
parks, it is essential that the anticipated water demand is discussed with the appropriate industrialists,
developers and planning authorities.

Beware that there is a tendency for planners to over-estimate water needs in order to ensure the
adequacy of the water supply to a development.

1.2.2.4 Leakage and other technical losses

Water is lost from the Diam’s system through a number of ways:

1. Leakage – slow continual loss of water through small holes in the mains, poor joints and the
like;
2. Bursts, where the volume lost can be large but are generally of short duration;
3. Water lost when a mains system has to be drained down in order to repair a leak or burst,
including water used to flush the main and take water quality samples after the burst;
4. Water lost from reservoirs and other storage facilities due to non-closing inlet valves, wash-out
valves not fully closed, incorrectly set water level recorders when a reservoir is filled by pumps
controlled by the reservoir level and from leakage through the structure, and
5. Water lost from leaking pump glands, inadequately maintained sluice valves, hydrants etc.

For a new distribution system that has been correctly designed, installed and commissioned, losses
should be negligible within the early years of the pipe system. In order to allow for some leakage,
especially during the later life of the system, an allowance needs to be made.

This will be the higher of the following two calculations:


 15% of total domestic and non-domestic consumption;
 10 m3/d/km of network in dense urban or 5 m3/d/km in other areas

1.2.2.5 Water used by Diam in its normal operations

The Diam will use water during its normal day-to-day operations for such activities as mains cleansing
and running hydrants for water quality sample analysis.

Normally, the water used is minimal and can be considered as included within the technical losses. If
there is known to be specific problems in the area, for example with debris settling in the mains due to
the condition of the mains or as sand “carried over” from the treatment/source works, an allowance of
2% of customer demand can be assumed.

1.2.2.6 Firefighting

Distribution network should incorporate fire hydrants in accordance with the Public Authority for Civil
Defense and Ambulance (PACDA) requirements. Each project must get their approval for the location
of fire hydrants.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 24 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Table 1.5 shows the additional ground service reservoir capacity for firefighting and the flow capacity of
the distribution system.
Table 1.5. Additional capacity required for firefighting.

Population (Capita) Capacity (m3)

Less than 5,000 50

Less than 10,000 100


Less than 20,000 200

Less than 30,000 300

Less than 40,000 350

Less than 50,000 400

Less than 60,000 450

Greater than 60,000 500

In particular, Table 1.6 shows more details about PACDA requirements where the hydrant shall be
design to deliver a flow of 1 m3/min. Water pressure in adjacent network supplying residential areas
may become affected during fire but no negative pressure is allowed.
Table 1.6. Additional capacity required for firefighting.

Number of hydrants Spacing Running period


Importance
working at once (m) (minutes)
Light – residential 1 100 – 150 30

Medium – commercial 2 75 – 100 60

High – industrial and storage 4 60 – 75 90

1.2.2.7 Commercial losses

Commercial losses are generally included at design stage within domestic and non-domestic
consumptions.
1.2.2.8 Meter and other income determination errors

In addition to the recorded flow of water to a customer, there might be an additional flow not recorded
by the meter due to wear of the meter; the meter being incorrectly installed or, in extreme, the meter
has blocked or has stopped recording for some other reason.
A key consideration can be the type of meter installed being one that is not capable of recording very
low flows that can occur when a customer’s inlet valve to a cistern is not closing off.

It should be noted that the meter error is included within the above per capita consumption rates. Thus,
meter error normally affects the income received by the Diam and the historical records of consumption
in a given supply area, not the quantity of water that it has to supply.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 25 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
1.2.2.9 Unknown connections and theft

These are obviously not known as they would be stopped, disconnected or converted into a legitimate
connection. As such no specific allowance need to be made, unless it is known that the mains are to
be laid in an area where illegal connections may be made.

1.2.3 Headroom

Not used in the design of distribution pipelines, but used for source/treatment works, pumping stations
and transmission pipelines, is the concept of “headroom”.

Headroom is needed for several reason including operational outage, uncertainty in forecasting water
demand and to provide a spare capacity to meet desired level of service. In water sources/treatment
works, Diam is providing 7% as a headroom for operational outage and 1% for the uncertainty. Noting
that the percentage for the uncertainty is increasing every five-years by an increment of 1%, means will
reach 5% for a design period of 25 years.

Following a major incident, the Diam’s reservoirs and mains will be depleted. The quantity of water to
be supplied by Diam in these conditions must be such as to not only meet demand, but also to refill the
reservoirs and re-charge the transmission pipelines.

Customers may have been without water for a considerable time. They will need to use water for a
backlog of purposes, and their storage will need to be re-filled.

In order to provide for this addition demand to refill the reservoirs and re-charge the transmission
pipelines, pump stations and transmission pipelines are designed to meet the average daily flow not
over 24 hours, but over 21 hours i.e. the works are designed to supply 24/21 (1.14) times the annual
daily flow or, put another way, with 15% extra capacity than would otherwise be provided. This ratio can
be refined for large systems where several sources of water or pumping stations may be used
concurrently to supply the demand.

1.2.4 Peak factors in distribution system

Water demand of customers can vary by hour, day and season. Thus, water distribution networks shall
be designed for peak hour demand. However, transmission pipelines shall be designed for peak day
demand.

The total quantity of water supplied or drawn for 365 days, divided by 365 is the average daily
demand. This is the normal reference flow.
Domestic per capita figures quoted relate to the annual average demand.

At various times of the year and as a result of seasonal needs, people will use more water in some
days. A similar higher demand can occur at weekends when customers are at home. This is known as
the peak day demand and shall be calculated as the average day demand in the peak week (7-days
rolling) excluding leakage. The peak can vary from one area to another. Past records of the study area,
or a similar one, should be consulted to determine the historic peak day factor to be used in the design.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 26 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
People draw water according to their needs. Diam has to meet the instantaneous water demand when
many people wish to draw water at the same time e.g. in the morning before going to work. This is
known as the peak hour demand. The peak hour demand can be extremely variable, depending as it
does on the actions of people in an area. Within a predominantly residential area where all the
customers leave at around the same time each day to go to work, take children to school, the peak
hour factor can be as much as 2-2.5 times the average hour on average day demand. The peak hour
demand can be significantly reduced where water goes first into a storage tank, and people draw from
the storage. The flow to a property is then limited by the capacity of the service pipe; not the quantity of
water used instantaneously.

The amount by which a peak demand exceeds the annual average demand is known as the peak day
or peak hour factor. The peak factors do not apply to all categories of demand. For example, leakage
will not vary. Industrial demand is usually more consistent – indeed Diam can ensure a consistent draw-
off by requiring the industrial premise to have storage and by limiting the size of the service pipe to the
premise.

Domestic and non-domestic water demand patterns for the Extended Period Simulation (EPS) are
shown in Table 1.7 and Table 1.8, respectively. More specific and updated patterns for the DMAs shall
be obtained from the Water Utility prior design.

Table 1.7. Domestic water demand pattern.

Time Multiplier Time Multiplier Time Multiplier Time Multiplier


0:15 0.23 6:15 2.4 12:15 1 18:15 1.051
0:30 0.23 6:30 2.2 12:30 1 18:30 0.995
0:45 0.23 6:45 2 12:45 1 18:45 0.94
1:00 0.23 7:00 2 13:00 1 19:00 0.884
1:15 0.213 7:15 1.75 13:15 1 19:15 0.823
1:30 0.213 7:30 1.63 13:30 1 19:30 0.763
1:45 0.213 7:45 1.51 13:45 0.951 19:45 0.702
2:00 0.213 8:00 1.39 14:00 0.995 20:00 0.642
2:15 0.213 8:15 1.34 14:15 1.04 20:15 0.588
2:30 0.255 8:30 1.34 14:30 1.084 20:30 0.535
2:45 0.298 8:45 1.32 14:45 1.128 20:45 0.481
3:00 0.34 9:00 1.31 15:00 1.172 21:00 0.465
3:15 0.528 9:15 1.345 15:15 1.193 21:15 0.388
3:30 0.715 9:30 1.38 15:30 1.214 21:30 0.349
3:45 0.903 9:45 1.415 15:45 1.235 21:45 0.283
4:00 1.09 10:00 1.45 16:00 1.256 22:00 0.3
4:15 1.325 10:15 1.393 16:15 1.249 22:15 0.3
4:30 1.56 10:30 1.335 16:30 1.242 22:30 0.3
4:45 1.7 10:45 1.278 16:45 1.235 22:45 0.3
5:00 1.8 11:00 1.22 17:00 1.228 23:00 0.3
5:15 2 11:15 1.135 17:15 1.198 23:15 0.3
5:30 2.2 11:30 1.05 17:30 1.168 23:30 0.23
5:45 2.4 11:45 1 17:45 1.137 23:45 0.23
6:00 2.5 12:00 1 18:00 1.107 0:00 0.23

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 27 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Table 1.8. Non-domestic water demand pattern.

Time Multiplier Time Multiplier Time Multiplier Time Multiplier


0:15 0.859 6:15 0.859 12:15 1.198 18:15 0.859
0:30 0.859 6:30 0.859 12:30 1.198 18:30 0.859
0:45 0.859 6:45 0.859 12:45 1.198 18:45 0.859
1:00 0.859 7:00 0.859 13:00 1.198 19:00 0.859
1:15 0.859 7:15 0.939 13:15 1.198 19:15 0.859
1:30 0.859 7:30 1.029 13:30 1.198 19:30 0.859
1:45 0.859 7:45 1.108 13:45 1.198 19:45 0.859
2:00 0.859 8:00 1.198 14:00 1.198 20:00 0.859
2:15 0.859 8:15 1.198 14:15 1.198 20:15 0.859
2:30 0.859 8:30 1.198 14:30 1.198 20:30 0.859
2:45 0.859 8:45 1.198 14:45 1.198 20:45 0.859
3:00 0.859 9:00 1.198 15:00 1.198 21:00 0.859
3:15 0.859 9:15 1.198 15:15 1.198 21:15 0.859
3:30 0.859 9:30 1.198 15:30 1.198 21:30 0.859
3:45 0.859 9:45 1.198 15:45 1.198 21:45 0.859
4:00 0.859 10:00 1.198 16:00 1.198 22:00 0.859
4:15 0.859 10:15 1.198 16:15 1.198 22:15 0.859
4:30 0.859 10:30 1.198 16:30 1.198 22:30 0.859
4:45 0.859 10:45 1.198 16:45 1.198 22:45 0.859
5:00 0.859 11:00 1.198 17:00 1.198 23:00 0.859
5:15 0.859 11:15 1.198 17:15 1.108 23:15 0.859
5:30 0.859 11:30 1.198 17:30 1.029 23:30 0.859
5:45 0.859 11:45 1.198 17:45 0.939 23:45 0.859
6:00 0.859 12:00 1.198 18:00 0.859 0:00 0.859

1.3 Water Transmission and Distribution Networks

1.3.1 Future water demand – Design horizon and phasing of assets


1.3.1.1 General

Any design must take into account the likely growth in demand in the areas that will be fed from the new
main(s).

Whilst it is normally not desirable to lay a second pipe in the future to allow for future growth, there can
sometimes be an advantage. For example, if the development is to be staged it might be cost-beneficial,
if space permits, to lay one main for the immediate development and to follow this with a duplication
when subsequent development takes place. An alternative would be to convert a gravity main to a
pumped main to “force through” more water.

Such phasing is only likely to be cost-effective for large diameter mains and when there will be a
significant time difference between the development phases. The justification can only be after a cost-
benefit analysis is made. The same can be applied for all associated works to pipelines as detailed in
4.1.5 .

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 28 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
A more likely, and advantageous, scenario would be to lay one main along one route and then duplicate
the main along a second, separate route.

In some instances, short sections of main across roads have been installed and left blanked off allowing
an additional main to be laid in the future picking up these blanked off mains. This allows an extra
parallel main to be laid at minimal cost as the difficult sections have been installed at the time of the
original main being laid.

The design horizon for Diam projects is 25 years for distribution networks and transmission pipelines,
excluding design and contracting period.

1.3.1.2 Water demand


See above.

1.3.1.3 An “All-In’’ figure for preliminary estimating


Surprisingly and consistently, a “rule of thumb” all-in peak day design flow that can be used for
preliminary estimating within an area, is found to be between 300 and 350 lpcd.

1.3.2 Desired pressure


The pressure within a pipeline is determined by the pressure at the start of the pipeline and at the
terminal point. Pressure at various points along the pipeline is shown on the hydraulic gradient that must
be prepared for all transmission pipelines during preliminary design at the latest.

The hydraulic gradient can be used to determine the pressure rating of the pipe to be used.
It is important to ensure that:

1. Pipeline profile should not go above the gradient line at any point;
2. The pipeline does not empty into a receiving reservoir due to the hydraulic conditions at the
end of the pipeline, e.g. a motorized valve or altitude valve should be placed at each end of
the pipeline;
3. At no place must the pressure within the pipeline exceed the manufacturer’s pressure rating
for the pipe and the maximum strength of the material shall not be exceeded based on the
total load (internally and externally due to surcharge).

To avoid the above happening, a break pressure tank may be required, or an elaborate control system
installed at the terminal reservoir.

If branches are to be taken off the main under design, the adequacy of the pressure at the take-off must
be determined and, if necessary, a booster pump(s) or a pressure reducing valve installed.

Normally, the aim of the design is to transfer a desired flow down the main whilst achieving a minimum
pressure at the far end. This minimum pressure could be the top water level of a service reservoir or
water tower. The pressure could be a service level required to feed properties or the desired suction
pressure of a transfer pump at the end of the main being designed.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 29 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
In a distribution system water should be supplied with adequate pressure and flow. However, pressure
is lost due to friction at the pipe wall and in pipe line components such as valves and bends. The amount
of pressure loss is also dependent on the water demand from customers, pipe material, length, gradient
and diameter.

To deliver sufficient quantities of water the pressure head in the network should, wherever possible, be
at least 1.5 bar (15 mwc, worst point peak day, peak hour) in all parts of the network, including the
remotest and highest points. The maximum pressure should not exceed 6 bar (60 mwc).

In case of firefighting flows, pressure in the network shall be maintained as minimum positive value i.e.
negative pressure should not be developed in the network assuming zero parallel domestic use during
fire.

1.3.3 Velocity
Normal design velocity is 1 m/s. This figure is the point at which particles in the main will be picked up.
This helps to ensure that the main is self-cleaning and reduces long-term build up inside the main.
A peak velocity as high as 2.0 m/s, at a horizon of 25 years for transmission, is possible but is seldom
considered due to the high stresses this can cause and high pressure loss than can be generated over
short distances. A peak velocity of 1.5 m/s is more common but will depend on pipe diameter (more
acceptable for large pipes than small diameters). However, a safety factor shall be considered for future
expansion of the network.

1.3.4 Route and elevation


In consideration of the route of a pipeline, a number of factors must be taken into account:
1. The hydraulic gradient along the pipeline;
2. Where there is space to lay a main and to subsequently maintain the pipeline;
3. Ground conditions;
4. Obstructions are other difficulties to be overcome both in the laying and continued operation
of the main, such as wadis;
5. Major road crossings;
6. Environmentally sensitive areas;
7. Safety of the Diam staff in gaining access to the pipeline, and
8. The proximity of areas that could be serviced from the main.
9. Other existing or planned utilities (sewer, oil/gas pipelines, cables) should be taken into
consideration;
10. Roads easements standards should be considered.

Sometimes it will be necessary to consider alternative routes and also intermediate boosters to re-lift
the pressure.

Sometimes it is necessary to tunnel under obstacles with a relatively short section of smaller diameter
main. Directional boring of large diameter pipes can be a major cost and so reducing the size of the
main at such crossing points is often desirable. Often for security of supply such crossings are
duplicated. For example, a 400 mm main could cross a major road with 2 parallel 300 mm diameter
mains. If this action is taken, the twin bores should be suitably distanced apart so that an incident to the
first bore does not affect the second. The water carrier pipe should be laid within a sleeve to enable a

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 30 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
failed pipe to be readily removed and replaced. For the same reason, two adjustable couplings with a
connecting piece should be provided.

All crossings of major obstacles should be guarded by in-line valves either side of the obstacle.

All branches of a transmission pipelines shall be metered.

No service connection should be taken directly off a transmission pipelines. A fault with the connection
may require the main to be shut down, with possible consequences on maintaining supplies. If a
connection is required, it should be taken from a tapping drilled into a blank flange on a branch tee,
“guarded” by a valve.

1.3.5 Surge
Surge is a specialist subject for which advice should be taken.

All transmission pipelines, pumped or gravity, should be evaluated for the risk of excessive surge
pressures developing. If required, anti-surge measures should be adopted and necessary protection
should be provided to the pipeline. Details is shown in 6.4.2 .

1.3.6 Valves
Valves should be installed so that, where possible, all parts of the network can be controlled without
adversely affecting another part. As a minimum valve shall be installed:
 On all branch connections,
 On all branches from feeder mains;
 Between feeder pipes and hydrants;
 Not more than 2 valves at a tee;
 Preferably at a uniform distance from pipe intersections;
 Not more than 3 valves at a cross;
 Washouts at all valley points.

All valves must be located with due concern for the safety of the Diam staff/contractor during their
operation.
Valves can be buried or installed in a chamber. The criteria for chambers are given in CHAPTER 6 for
Transmission and Distribution pipelines.

The chambers should be constructed to take the end thrust of the pipe against the closed valve.
Some in-line valves may be electrically operated and some are provided with a by-pass (systematically
above DN 300).
Detailing about spacing is described in CHAPTER 6 under 6.1.13 .

1.3.7 Pipe materials


Consideration needs to be given to the material of the pipe material as shown in CHAPTER 6 .

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 31 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
1.3.8 Energy considerations
For a pumping pipeline, there is normally a choice between a large pipe diameter with a corresponding
low pumping head – a high CAPEX/ low OPEX option - or a smaller pipe diameter with a larger pumping
requirement – a low CAPEX/ high OPEX option. Pipeline life-time design horizon shall be considered
so as the flow velocity does not exceed the maximum values at the end of life.

In order to evaluate the options and determine the most suitable, a cost benefit analysis is required
considering both OPEX and CAPEX, over the whole life of the assets. The cost of the booster
maintenance, replacement and running costs should be considered.

Having a transfer booster mid-point along a transmission pipeline can have a dramatic impact on
pressures along the length of the pipeline. It is possible to use pipeline with lower pressure rating and
background leakage may also be reduced. Additionally, future pipeline breaks should be reduced as a
result of operating at a lower average operating pressure along the length of the pipeline.

1.4 Water Quality

Consideration to water age should be made at design stage. Increased residence may lead the
deterioration in water quality e.g. reduce chlorine content, taste, odour and microbiological growth.

Hydraulic modelling should be used to assess age and potential water quality impact.

Designing pipeline`s future growth should consider range of flows (retention time) over the lifetime of
the pipe e.g. initially residence time may be significant due to low demand.

The type of water distribution network (closed loops or branched) will play a big role in the quality of the
water. Thus, in order to maintain the intended water quality, FH shall be installed at any dead-end or in
places where stagnant water is expected to be so as pipe flushing will take place.

1.5 Control Philosophy

1.5.1 Simple transmission pipeline to a demand area


In this instance, the demand from the customers determines how much water will flow down the pipeline.
There is little control that can be used on such a system other than pressure control.

The pipeline will have been sized to meet peak demand usage, however, at night demand is much
lower. Therefore, the pressure loss across the pipeline will be lower and the pressure on the pipeline
and within the demand area will increase.

It is possible to install a pressure reducing valve at a point along the new pipeline that will reduce
pressures at night to minimize leakage and burst rate.

In most Diam systems, transmission pipeline does not feed directly distribution zones.

1.5.2 Transmission pipeline into storage


Water is generally not directly sent to distribution pipeline in demand areas. Generally, all the water
reaches the storage service reservoir and is distributed by gravity.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 32 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
In this case, the normal method of control is to install a control valve on the inlet to the reservoir. This
can be controlled in three ways:

1. A valve – When water level in the reservoir falls below certain level the valve opens automatically
and allowing unrestricted flow into the reservoir. If the level exceeds an upper control point the
inlet valve shuts. This can be a floating valve. However, this system is not desired as it often
generates overflow if the valve is not closing properly. An electrical valve controlled by the level
in the reservoir is therefore preferred.

2. Flow Control – A modulating control valve on the inlet to the reservoir operates such that a set
flow is allowed into this reservoir. This control can be adjusted remotely from an operational
control room.

3. Pressure Sustaining Valve – A modulating control valve on the inlet to the reservoir that
maintains a set pressure upstream on the transmission main. This form of control is most
common where there is a high point on the transmission main that prevents unrestricted flow
from going into the reservoir. A PSV will ensure that positive pressure always exists on the
transmission main.

1.5.3 Transmission pipeline to the suction of a booster


This can occur if there is a high point at the end of the transmission route which requires a booster to
lift the water or if the transmission pipeline is of such a long length that a simple transmission system
with realistic pipeline diameters is not possible.

It is possible that an economic assessment of pipeline capacity vs. boosting energy indicates that this
is the preferred solution.

The size of the transmission pipeline will influence the suction and delivery at the transfer booster.

It is possible to combine all these elements and controls to ensure that it is possible to transfer a given
amount of water along any feasible construction route.

1.6 Security of Supply – Risk Management

See also the Emergency Response Manual.

Wherever possible, risk should be designed out of the water supply system.

Reservoir provides adequate security of supply to a network allowing enough time for a transmission
repair to take place, or a treatment works failure rectified. All supply areas should have a minimum of
48 hours storage located after the transmission system and as close as possible to the area of supply.

Whenever possible and providing a significant risk reduction effect compared with additional costs the
design of the system will take into account the following considerations:
 Alternative supply routes;

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 33 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 Limiting repair time through the use of standard pipe diameters and adequate provision of inline
valves and corresponding fittings (washout and air valves);
 Parallel pipes or ring main arrangements;
 Effective water storage for a minimum of two peak days.

1.7 Hydraulic Model Simulation

This section briefs the basic requirements that Diam expects from the consultant who prepares
hydraulic modeling. In general, the hydraulic model simulations are divided into two main categories:
i) Steady-state and extended-period simulations (EPS) and ii) Transient study. The consultant has
to ensure that design attributes will satisfy design requirements. Overall, the entire modelling process
consists of the following steps:
a. Input data collection
b. Model building
c. Arriving optimum solutions
d. Model testing

1.7.1 Input data collection


Collection of reliable input is the prime element in the modelling process, high quality information
concerning demand, system dimensions, materials and the maintenance level is crucial for accurate
results; it has to be noted that “quality of the input = quality of the output”. Well conducted fieldwork
data collection is, therefore, a very important basic step of the modelling procedure, especially for
the extension of existing network and augmentation of existing assets. For green field distribution
and transmission projects, assessing future water demand is utmost important that affects the
economics of the project. The information to be collected are enlisted below.

1.7.2 General
- Layout of the existing system – pipe routes and junctions, location of the main components;
- Topography – ground elevations in the area of the system, understanding the low/high
elevations, and wadi and other restricted area such as graveyard, archeological sites, etc.;
- Population – distribution and estimated growth;
- Base map – understand the land-use pattern, type of residential/commercial or special
buildings.

1.7.3 Water demand


- Demand categories present in the system: domestic, commercial, industry, special
demands such as tourism, healthcare etc.;
- Average consumption, patterns of variation: daily, weekly, and seasonal. This shall be
obtained from the Water Utility;
- Type of domestic water use: direct supply, basement/roof tanks, etc., average household
size, habits with respect to water use;
- Demand forecasting – anticipated demand at the end of design period. This is the most
critical input, in general demand forecast shall be conducted in two ways: i) population
projection and ii) plot count method. Plot sub-division shall be considered and local
Municipality shall be consulted for their future plan of land use. The consultant has to
calculate future water demand based on these two methods and shall advise Water Utility
for the selection. If the difference is abnormal and non-logical then ultimate demand shall

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 34 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
be made between these two methods, judicious decision shall be taken after consultation
with Water Utility.

1.7.4 Network layout


- Nodes (demand/discharge points) – concerns predominantly the supply points of at least a
few hundred consumers or special demands. Relevant for each point are: location (X, Y) in
the system, ground elevation (Z) and average consumption and dominant categories.
- Pipes, concerns predominantly the pipes DN ≥ 100 mm. Relevant for each pipe are length,
internal diameter, material and condition of pipe for assessment of roughness.
- Service reservoirs – type (ground, elevated), capacity, minimum and maximum water level,
shape (e.g. described through the volume–depth curve), inlet/outlet arrangement.
- Pumping stations – number and type (variable, fixed speed) of pumps; duty head and flow
and preferably the pump characteristics for each unit; age and condition of pumps;
efficiency and energy consumption.
- Fire Hydrants (FH) – number, flow and pressure according to PACDA requirements.
- Others – description of appurtenances that may significantly influence the system operation
(e.g. valves, measuring equipment, etc.)

1.7.5 Model building


It is expected that the consultant has to build the hydraulic network in Bentley WaterGEMS
software (licensed). The consultant has to submit the soft copy of hydraulic model to Diam for review
and approval. In that, the following input information is required in all cases:

 Nodes: identification, location and elevation, base demand and pattern of demand
variation.
 Reservoirs: identification, position, top and bottom water level, description of the shape
(cross-section area, either the volume–depth diagram), initial water level at the beginning
of the simulation, inlet/outlet arrangement.
 Pipes: identification, length, diameter, description of roughness, minor loss factor.
 Pumps: identification, description of pump characteristics, speed (fixed/variable),
operation mode.
 Pump station: identification, number of pumps running/standby.
 Valves: identification, type of valve, diameter, head-loss when fully open, operation mode.

For simulations of water quality, additional input information is required, such as: initial
concentrations, patterns of variation at the source, decay coefficients, etc. Finally, a number of
parameters which control the simulation run itself, have to be specified in the input: duration of the
simulation, time intervals, accuracy, preferred format of the output, etc.

Based on the input, the raw results of hydraulic simulation are flow patterns for links, and piezometric
heads recalculated into pressures and water levels for junctions.

In addition, the water quality simulations offer the following patterns in each junction:
– concentration of specified constituent,
– water age,
– mixing of water from different sources.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 35 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
For transient analysis, the consultant has to use precise elevation (from as-built info) for the existing
system and for green field projects, reliable elevation data to be used that are not varying more than
±10 m. However, the data considering during the detailed design to be verified against the actual
pipeline profile before finalizing the surge suppression equipment or system.

1.7.6 Arriving Optimum Solutions


Arriving optimum solution is the final step of the modelling process and probably the important and
time consuming one. Some of the typical problems that can be solved by the help of a computer
model are:
- The selection of optimal pipe diameters for a given layout and demand scenario.
- The selection of optimal models for pumps.
- The selection of optimal position, elevation and volume of the reservoir(s).
- The optimization of the pump scheduling (to minimize energy consumption).
- The optimization of the reservoir operation (water depth variation).
- The optimization of the valve operation.
- The simulation of fires.
- Pipeline criticality analysis.
- The planning of pipe flushing in the system.
- The analysis of failures of the main system components (risk assessment).
- The analysis of water quality in the system (chlorine residuals, water age and mixing of
water from various sources).

In many of these problems, the advantage of a quick calculation combined with proper analysis of
the model response to the change of input data will lead to correct conclusions on the network
performance after a series of ‘trial and error’ simulations.

1.7.7 Model Testing


The consultant has to confirm that:
- The model is providing a logical response to the altering of the input data; the simulation runs
are, in this case, function in the model validation.
- The model is behaving in relation to the real system, especially for the extension of existing
distribution system, augmentation of transmission pipeline, and water quality assessment
projects. Computer models cannot totally match a real situation; the results should always be
judged based on the quality of input data and the measurements used for model calibration.

1.7.8 Record keeping


Hydraulic models shall be produced and maintained appropriately so that the standards of accuracy,
completeness and level of detail are appropriate for the planning, monitoring, leakage reduction,
rehabilitation assessment, etc. Always, model development shall begin with careful planning to
define requirements and to investigate the sources of information available. The hydraulic model is
a constant investment for Diam. Hence, it shall be prepared meticulously by proper planning and
oversight, at a minimum, by an experience hydraulic engineer in co-ordination with a master planner
and operations team.
There are many types of data that are used to build hydraulic models. Thus, documentation during
the model construction and calibration tasks is essential to manage these data and provide for
effective long-term model maintenance. This is especially important when transferring the model
from consultant to Diam modelers.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 36 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
1.7.9 Submission to Diam
Before submitting the model soft copy to Diam, the consultant has to ensure that the model run
successfully (all scenarios) without prompting any errors. Along, with the model all supported
documents to be submitted such as background image, shape file etc. Diam expects the following
but not limited from the consultant:
a. Steady state analysis results for pipes, junctions, reservoirs and control valves;
b. EPS results at different time period (for pipes, junctions, reservoirs and control valves);
c. Fire Flow Analysis - when performing FFA, at all junction base demand shall be ignored if the
system has more than 500 nodal demand junctions otherwise average demand + FFA
demand to be considered;
d. Water Quality analysis (Generally chlorine and age of water);
e. System head curves for various scenarios, different pump operations, various speed pump
operations;
f. Energy cost for various scenarios, various pump operating conditions;
g. Criticality analysis results (main pipe breakage or isolation of valves that affecting the system
significantly).

1.7.10 Integration with geographic information systems (GIS)


In Diam, there is a dedicated department for the GIS, they are building, maintaining and updating
below/above ground asset data. The role of GIS in Diam continues to grow and highly influence the
evolution of hydraulic modeling. Diam is on the path of integrating the hydraulic model with the GIS,
SCADA, CIS for more robust interoperability with modeling databases, improved performance with
large datasets. This interfacing can add more value to an organization, customer and operational
perspective.

Integration of the hydraulic model with the GIS requires the highest quality of GIS data. The
consultant has to extend his support in case required for eliminating errors that are identified during
the model integration process. GIS department has to get a copy of these data prior tendering so as
can be shared with other Authorities that will help in planning.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 37 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
CHAPTER 2 WELLS AND ACCESSORIES

Chapter 2 describes the well and accessories requirements to fulfill water source quality for a water

supply system. This chapter in general, is detailing the standards and specifications that are

recommended to be followed for ''Bore Well Drilling'' in the works related to Diam. This chapter includes

overall information, criteria and practices for construction of wells in different aquifers.

This chapter is a standalone chapter and shall be read in line with the requirements of other chapters within this

document “Integrated Water Supply System” as well as with the other publications by Diam e.g. manuals, standard

specifications and drawings.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 38 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
2.1 Water Sources

Though ground water is one of the major sources of water in Sultanate of Oman, due to the poor quality
and quantity of available ground water in certain areas, sea water desalination is carried out to meet the
potable demands of the citizens. But as a reserve, ground water is used as and when needed on
emergencies and hence this exercises to standardize the abstraction techniques of the ground water.

Ground water is abstracted by the following conventional techniques:

a. Open Wells
b. Bore Wells

Of the above, open wells are not much suitable for bulk abstraction due to the limitation in depth.
Instead, deep drilled bore wells are widely used by water supply agencies and hence this document
focuses mainly on the bore well construction and its related techniques.

2.2 Groundwater Identification

Being it open well or bore well; the well location is a prime factor which would very much influence the
performance of the well. Selection of the aquifer/well location depends upon the following aspects:

1. Hydrogeology
2. Surface geophysics
3. Subsurface geophysics

2.2.1 Hydrogeology
In groundwater resource identification, the objective is to locate deposits of ''water bearing sub-strata''
with relatively high permeability. Such a water bearing sub-strata is called ''aquifer''. The potential of
an aquifer is mainly determined by:

 its geometry - extent, thickness etc.,


 its hydrodynamic characteristics - transmissivity, stored volume of water,
 its influencing boundaries - presence of surface water bodies (rivers, lakes, wadi courses) or
tight boundaries (rock, clay as per existing geological setup),
 proximity of sea-line,
 its natural recharge - effective rainfall, extent of the catchment area.

In order to classify them as potential aquifers such deposits should meet the following requirements.

 Occurrence in sufficient thickness


 Enough areal extent to provide large storage volumes
 Enough annual recharge (rains)

A thorough analysis of the underground stratification, buried topography, inflow and outflow, rainfall,
evaporation etc. of the related area needs to be carried out to determine the quality and quantity of

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 39 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
water that can be abstracted for a considerably a long time from any aquifer. The performance and
the available data from the nearby wells in operation could also provide information on the aquifer
under study.

2.2.2 Surface geophysics

Surface geophysical surveys are of major importance to assess the status of underlying water aquifer.
The survey is carried out on the ground surface prior to reconnaissance drilling in order to define areas
with greatest potential and to find the best locations for water abstraction. Two types of geophysical
surveys are widely in use:

 Electric resistivity method.


 Electromagnetic methods.

2.2.3 Subsurface geophysics


Subsurface geophysics study requires drilling of a pilot bore hole to conduct certain studies at the depths
of the aquifer. This operation consists of running special probes upward/downward in the borehole in
order to identify water bearing strata. A 100 mm reconnaissance borehole down to the bedrock is drilled
to measure the entire thickness of the aquifer and its characteristics. Two types of subsurface
geophysical surveys are widely in use:

 Electric logging – this is good for locating shallow aquifers.


 Gamma-ray logging – good for hard strata

From the borehole observation the geological strata, ground permeability and water salinity can be
assessed.

2.2.4 Well site location


With the acquired data and information from the above, the suitable well location shall be identified
following the sequences of activities as below:

2.2.4.1 Desk study


 Geological data and information,
 Topographic maps and aerial photography,
 Surface and Sub-surface geophysics,
 Existing data on wells and or boreholes (borehole logs),
 Existing data on down-hole geophysics and pumping tests,
 Hydro-geological information (groundwater levels and piezometric maps),
 Groundwater quality data (chemistry and salinity contours).

2.2.4.2 Site survey


 Accessibility of drilling rigs,
 Geotechnical and geological features,
 Co-ordination with authorities (right-of-way, ownership, other users, etc.)

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 40 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
In the Sultanate, most of these exercises are done by Ministry of Regional Municipalities and Water
Resources and the final recommendation on the well location and the depth to drill are provided along
with the ''Well Drilling Permit'' which is mandatory before commencing the works.

2.3 Well Drilling

As a general rule, after finalizing the well location and the parameters, the production bore well shall
be drilled around 50 m away from the pilot bore well to avoid interferences. The choice of method of
drilling depends primarily upon the geological strata and the depth to drill.

2.3.1 Drilling techniques


Following are the Drilling Techniques that are commonly used:

1. Rotary Percussion drilling used for aquifers with consolidated hard strata such as limestone,
sandstone, plutonic or volcanic rocks. This technique would involve using foam to remove the
drill cut materials.

2. Rotary drilling adapted to drill through unconsolidated loose strata. This technique would
involve using ''Bentonite'' mud to stabilize the loose wall while drilling and to flush out the drill
cut materials.

3. Percussion Drilling with bailer is suitable for both but not used generally by Diam.

2.3.2 Drilling procedure


Drilling Procedure in general includes the following steps:

1. Core drilling for surface casing


2. Installation of surface casing and concrete protection
3. Well core drilling to the designed depth
4. Installation of casing and screen
5. Installation of dip tube
6. Gravel pack surround and installing centralizers
7. Well development
8. Pumping test
9. Well disinfection and flushing
10. Chemical and bacterial water analysis
11. Well head platform construction

2.3.2.1 Core drilling for surface casing


For all the wells, Core drilling for surface casing shall be 16 to 18-inch diameter drilling to a minimum
depth of 6 m to accommodate the surface casing.

2.3.2.2 Installation of surface casing and concrete protection


Material of surface casing shall be Mild Steel, Stainless Steel or PE100 as per the design. This casing
shall be concreted to the full depth to give stability to the well and as well as to act as a seal against

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 41 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
sub-surface pollution. The exposed head shall have a concrete base of a minimum of one square
meter.

2.3.2.3 Well core drilling


Well core drilling shall be in accordance with the finished diameter of the bore well.

For the finished bore well diameter of 6 inch (150 mm) the drilling shall be 225 mm.
For the finished bore well diameter of 8 inch (200 mm) the drilling shall be 325 mm.

This shall be to the full depth of the bore well.


Suitable technique of drilling based on the strata shall be followed – either hard rock or loose strata and
corresponding techniques shall be followed. Compressed air foam lift shall be used for removing the
cut bits and in case of un-consolidated strata 'Bentonite Mud Clay' shall be used to stabilize the wall.

Following data shall be recorded as a must while carrying out drilling operation to the full depth:

 Time of start and stop of each session


 Depth of start and stop at each session
 Rate of penetration
 Soil samples at every meter – collected, numbered and bagged
 Depth at which water strikes
 Water sampling and analysis at every meter after water strike – pH and EC
 Rate of water flow measured through 'V' Notch at every 5 minutes or as required

At this stage, with the available data on quality and quantity of water, the suitability of the well to continue
further shall be decided. If found suitable further steps in well construction shall be continued or else in
the unfortunate event of poor quality and or poor yield, the well construction shall be discontinued and
filled back as instructed by the Site Engineer.

2.4 Well Casing and Screen

Well casing and screen go together in a well construction. Well casing is basically a solid impermeable
lining for the drilled hole to act as a wall to maintain the open hole from collapsing and withstand the
back-flushing head pressure. The material of the casing shall be as per the design and the commonly
used are Stainless Steel (type 304, 316, duplex), PE100 or uPVC. In certain hard rock formation well is
left without casing but it is preferable to have well casing. This casing shall run through the entire depth
of the well excepting for the places of the screen.

Well screen shall be made of similar material as the casing but shall have permeability in the form of
slots to allow water from the aquifer to enter into the well chamber with a minimum of resistance and
without letting the passage of sand during pumping. Casing and screen shall run through the entire
well depth alternatively or in sections as per the well design based on water bearing strata.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 42 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
2.4.1 Physical and chemical qualities of casing and screen materials
2.4.1.1 Physical
 Material should be in compliance with International Standard Specifications
 Shall have greater strength to weight ratio
 Uniform wall thickness
 Uniform nominal diameter (ND) and outer diameter (OD)
 Shall be straight without buckling and bending
 Shall be unruffled with the inner and outer diameter
 Shall have homogeneous texture and have smooth finish in and out to avoid hydraulic friction
 Shall stand against abrasion, erosion pitting and encrustation

2.4.1.2 Chemical
 Withstand pH range 7-10
 Chemically resistant and WRAS certified.

2.4.1.3 Joints
Casing and Screen shall have threaded joints preferably with ''Trapezoidal'' threads. Joint length shall
be a minimum of 200 mm.

2.4.1.4 Screen
Selection of screen depends upon the ground strata, soil type, grain size, available water quantity, rate
of abstraction etc. Salient parameters of screen slots:

 Screen slots shall be commensurate with rate of abstraction of water.


 Combined slot area should not exceed 60% of the total surface area of the pipe surface.
 At any horizontal layer along the circumference, slots should not exceed 60%.
 Slot size shall be such that the flow through velocity in the range of 1 – 6 cm/sec.
 ‘‘Ribbed Screens" shall be preferred.
 In case of ''perforated-slot screens'' opening area shall be 10 - 12%
 In case of ''continuous slot wire wound screens'' opening area shall be 30-50%

The installed casing and screen shall be straight and truly vertical in status and any deviated casing
shall result in disapproval of the well.

Table 2.1. Open area of slotted screens.

Slot Type Bridge Slot Slotted Plastic Continuous Slot


Slot Size Diameter

Slot no. mm 8'' 10'' 12'' 8'' 10'' 12'' 8'' 10'' 12''
20 0.5 4 18 18 14
30 0.8 3 2 3 8 6 25 25 16
40 1.0 8 8 30 30 21
50 1.3 10 35 35 24
60 1.5 6 5 6 14 11 11 41 33 28

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 43 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Slot Type Bridge Slot Slotted Plastic Continuous Slot
Slot Size Diameter

Slot no. mm 8'' 10'' 12'' 8'' 10'' 12'' 8'' 10'' 12''
90 2.3 48 43 37
100 2.5 21 16 16 52 46 39
125 3.2 13 12 13 51 51 45

2.4.1.5 Dip tube


A ''Dip Tube'' to the full depth of the well along the outer side of the main casing shall be installed to
facilitate the water level measurements without interfering with the pump riser pipe and the power and
sensor cables. This tube shall be of 25 mm ID PE100 solvent jointed and shall have perforations at
equal intervals – preferably 2 Nos. 6 mm holes at 1 m c/c all along - to allow water raise through the
tube. It is preferable to have this dip tube tied along with the casing while lowering the same.

2.4.1.6 Gravel pack


Gravel pack around the casing and screen is necessary in all cased wells. It shall be of broken stone –
preferably rounded - of nominal size 25 mm. To have optimum performance of the well, the gravel pack
shall not be lesser than 75 mm thick around the casing and screen.

Gravel shall be homogenously filled along and around the casing/screen. Packing shall be from the
bottom to the top without any gaps. Verticality of the casing and screen should be maintained and
ensured all along while gravel packing. While doing the gravel packing ''Well Centralizer Rings'' shall
be installed at a minimum of 10 m center to center or as frequently as it may be required for the full
depth of the well to maintain the verticality of the well. Top of the gravel pack shall be concrete sealed
at the level of surface casing.

Commonly used diameters are:

Surface casing: 16”/400 mm


20”/500 mm
Casing / screen: 8” / 200 mm
10” / 250 mm
12” / 300 mm
Observation wells: 4” / 100 mm
6” / 150 mm

A finished cross section Well shall have the following features as shown in Figure 2.1.

2.5 Well Development


After installation of the casing, screen, gravel pack, centralizers and dip tube, the well shall be
developed in order to:
 improve the productivity
 get rid of the drilling fluid and fine particles that may have remained in the well
 adjust the level of gravel if necessary
 provide clear water with no suspended solids or turbidity.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 44 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Preferred methods of development shall be:
 air-lifting
 pumping from low to high discharge rate (over pumping)
 pumping by steps
 jetting and swabbing
 chemical cleaning - adding acids, polyphosphates
 air-flushing -injecting pressurized air in to the well

Two main parameters shall be monitored to assess the efficiency of the well development:
 solid content (sand particles),
 specific capacity (i.e. comparison of drawdown at constant pumping rate before/after
development).

Upon completion of well development, pumping tests shall be carried out to assess the recommended
yield of the well.

2.6 Pumping Test


Pumping tests are usually performed once the well is completed and properly developed so as to get a
clear concept of how the well would behave and its performance and efficiency. It also helps in arriving
at the recommended pumping rate and pumping pattern of the well.

Two types of pumping tests that are in vogue and shall be used:

 Step-drawdown test
 Constant discharge test

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 45 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Figure 2.1. Typical cross section of a completed bore well.

2.6.1 Step-drawdown test


A step draw-down test shall involve pumping at different steps - a minimum of 3 steps - for a duration
of 60 to 120 minutes each. It shall be performed at increasing discharge rates as detailed in Figure 2.2.
Before commencing the test, it is mandatory to observe and record the Static Water Level with reference
to a fixed datum and with date and time stamp. The same reference point shall be used in all the tests
at any time.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 46 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Figure 2.2. Concept of Step-Drawdown Test.

Temperature, electrical conductivity, salinity and pH of the water shall be measured and recorded during
each step with time stamps.

The ''Critical Flow Rate'' is defined as that particular pumping rate beyond which the turbulent flow
tends to increase the drawdown of the well in a geometric progression as shown in Figure 2.3.

Figure 2.3. Critical flowrate.

All the findings and observations of the tests shall be clearly recorded figuratively and graphically for
future reference and as a permanent history record of the well. These data shall be stored in hard copy
and as well as in soft copies.

After completion of step draw-down test enough time shall be allowed for the well to regain its original
status before starting subsequent test. and prior to starting the constant discharge test the water level
must be allowed to return to its original level which is recorded prior to commencing of the step
drawdown test.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 47 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
2.6.2 Constant discharge test
This test will enable determine the ''hydrodynamic characteristics'' of the aquifer in general and well in
specific.

During the test pumping rate shall be kept constant. The rate at which constant discharge test needs to
be conducted shall be arrived at from the observed data from the Step-Drawdown test conducted
earlier. The constant discharge test must be continued without any interruption for a minimum of 72
hours – draw down permitting.

Dynamic water levels/groundwater levels, temperature, electrical conductivity, salinity and pH of the
water must be measured at pre-fixed intervals and recorded with date and time stamping during the
pumping test.

The recovery must be measured at pre-fixed smaller frequencies for at least 12 hours as soon as the
pump stops and at the same time intervals as when pumping.

2.6.3 General protocol to maintain during monitoring pump tests

 The water level must be taken with an accuracy of a centimeter from a fixed reference point
whose reduced level is known.
 Water levels shall be measured before pumping starts - Static Water Level - SWL
 Water levels shall be measured during pumping - Dynamic Water Level - DWL, according to
Table 2.2.

Table 2.2. Water level during pumping according to the measured frequency.

Elapsed time since the beginning of Frequency of


pumping or recovery measurement
From 0 to 15 min 1 min
From 15 to 30 min 5 min
From 30 to 60 min 10 min
From 1 to 2 h 15 min
From 2 to 4 h 30 min
From 4 to 8 h 1h
>8h 2h

2.7 Methods to Measure Discharge

Following methods are widely in use for measuring the discharge rate while performing a pumping
test.
 Mechanical flowmeter
 Electromagnetic flowmeter
 Ninety-degree V-notch weir

Though V notch measurements have been widely used earlier, the most common used methods,
nowadays are mechanical flowmeters and electromagnetic flowmeters.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 48 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
2.8 Downhole Video Logging

Downhole video logging shall be carried out to confirm interior of the well. This operation allows to check
if the inner structure of the well is in conformation to the design and expectations. Problems like bad
position of the screen, deformation of the structure, or defective screwing, premature clogging or
sanding can be detected at this stage. Very importantly verticality of the well can be confirmed.

2.9 Well Head Facilities

Concrete well head shall be constructed to prevent polluting intrusions from the surface in to the well.
The different elements constituting a typical well head shall be as shown in Figure 2.4.

Figure 2.4. Typical Bore well, Details TET/SD/5001.

2.10 Well Disinfection

The most commonly used disinfectants are Sodium hypochlorite and Calcium hypochlorite.

The outline disinfection procedure shall be carried out as described briefly below:
 Calculate the volumes
 Add chlorine + contact time
 Check residual of chlorine
 Flush and take sample

2.11 Well Head Platform and Accessories

The well head platform and the fencing/compound protection shall be as below:

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 49 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 The plot limits of the well site shall be at least 10 m x 10 m for 150 mm diameter wells and 15m
x 15 m for 200 mm and above diameter wells
 Concrete slab 150 mm thick around the well casing over a minimum surface of 5 m² with a 45-
degree slope with a platform height of 100 cm above ground level
 Top of casing extending 30 cm above finished well platform level with drilled flanged end.
 Cover designed to prevent all kind of intrusion into the well
 Lockable fencing/compound to prevent unauthorized access and equipped with a proper
security device.
 A PVC coated chain linked fence of 2000 mm high with 3’’ GI tubes shall be installed with fence
holding concrete base of 600 mm deep all around (200 mm above and 400 mm below ground)
with a width of 200 mm
 Fence top shall have a single armed barbed wire
 A block work compound wall with similar dimensions and safety features
 Around the wall water weep holes of 2-inch PVC pipe at 3 meters intervals shall be provided
 In case of compound wall, a grilled window shall be provided near the well head to facilitate
crane operation during maintenance works.
 Well head platform shall be placed towards one side of the fence/compound to facilitate crane
operation during maintenance works.

2.12 Pumping System

After calculating the specific yield of the well from pumping tests, pump and control system can be
designed. In Oman, submersible pumps are mostly in use. Submersible pumps are quicker and easier
to install and are more efficient for deep wells as mechanical losses are limited.

The pumping system in general shall consist of the following appurtenances.


 Upstream single orifice air valve
 Downstream double orifice air valve
 Upstream/downstream pressure gauge
 Wash-out system
 Strainer
 Flowmeter
 Non-return valve
 Gate valves in appropriate locations
 Water sampling point

The standard installation of well pumping installation is given in the standard drawings.

2.13 Instrumentation
The borewell shall be equipped with the following instrumentations:
 Water quality online analyzer for residual chlorine, pH, conductivity, TDS, etc.
 Water level transmitter
 Pressure gauge with cut-off switch
 Well water level protection switch for pump and motor

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 50 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 Motor winding temperature
 Motors electrical protection
o overload relay
o low/high voltage relay

2.14 Well Completion Report

In general, the well completion report shall have the following documents in detail.
 Krookie (land sketch)
 Mulkiya (land ownership)
 Well drilling permit (given by Ministry of Regional Municipalities and Water Resources)
 Drill logs
 Soil samples
 Well development documents
 Lithology – report and graphics
 Pump test observations and recordings
 Pump test interpretations
 Recommended yield and pumping pattern
 Downhole video logging – report and softcopy
 Water quality analysis report – chemical and bacteriological analysis
 Well location map with grid reference
 Recommended maintenance schedule
 Work photographs - softcopy.

2.15 Regulation for The Protection of The Ground Water


In the Sultanate of Oman, water resources are limited and groundwater resources are subject to over
exploitation due to growing needs. The protection of the ground water became a major stake.

In 2000, Water Wealth Protection Law was issued by the Royal Decree no 29/2000 (replaced the Royal
Decree No 82/88) which declares water resources to be part of the national wealth and contains a
specific article dealing with protection of groundwater resources.

Furthermore, the law on Conservation of the Environment and Prevention of Pollution is the key law on
environmental protection and the prevention of pollution in Oman issued by the Royal Decree No
114/2001 (replaced the original Royal Decree No 10/82).

The pollution protection of the wellfields is under the responsibility of the Ministry of Environment and
Climate Affairs (MECA).

The law on protection of sources of potable water from pollution is issued by the Royal Decree No
115/2001 which addresses the protection of drinking water resources from pollution and empowers
MECA to identify drinking water protection zones. Activities likely to pollute drinking water will be
prohibited in these zones.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 51 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
The overall objectives of wellfield protection are to safeguard and protect the existing groundwater
reservoir against over extraction, pollution, and to prohibit and eliminate unauthorized land and water
uses that might adversely affect the wellfield.

Wellfield protection zones are designated by the ministerial decisions. Initially three ministerial decisions
were published in 1988/89. These regulations were modified, updated and amended in 2003.

The well fields are drilled and operated by the Diam.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 52 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
CHAPTER 3 DESALINATION BY REVERSE OSMOSIS

Chapter 3 describes the desalination by reverse osmosis requirements to fulfill water source

quality requirements for a drinking water supply system. The guideline shows general requirements

for an RO system, requirement for pre- and post-treatment design, chemical handing,

instrumentation and control.

This chapter is a standalone chapter and shall be read in line with the requirements of other chapters within this

document “Integrated Water Supply System” as well as with the other publications by Diam e.g. manuals, standard

specifications and drawings.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 53 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
3.1 Introduction

This chapter, Desalination by Reverse Osmosis, is prepared considering the experience of the design
team on detail design of Sea Water Reverse Osmosis plants. The design team shall be capable of
studying the following in detail, submission of accurate data and forecasts in the design report.
 Water quality study for sea water at the intended intake;
 Marine and bathymetric surveys;
 Relevant regulations and environmental acts;
 Seasonal biological behaviour of intake area and possible hazards.

3.2 General Requirements

3.2.1 Principle of reverse osmosis


Osmosis is a natural process involving fluid flows across a semipermeable membrane barrier. It is
selective in the sense that the solvent passes through the membrane at a faster rate than the dissolved
solid. When a semi permeable membrane separates two solutions with different concentrations of
dissolved salts, a flow of solvent from the less concentrated compartment to the other one occurs,
tending to balance the concentration gap. This flow creates a differential pressure between the two
compartments, called “osmotic pressure” – which depends mainly on the salinity gradient and on the
temperature (for a given type of membrane).
If a pressure higher than that of the osmotic pressure is applied on the compartment filled with the saline
(high Total Dissolved Solids - TDS) solution, the direction of the flow of solvent will change: solvent
(pure water) will flow from the high TDS compartment to the low TDS side. This phenomenon is called
“reverse osmosis” and may be used to produce drinking water from saline water.

From a pure hydraulic point of view: a flow of pressurized feed water is divided into a stream of permeate
(recovered on the other side of the membrane, at low pressure) and a stream of concentrate (flowing
out of the system from the same side of the membrane, as the feed water, and still at high pressure).

Key operating criteria to reverse osmosis is:

 The recovery rate: ratio between permeate and feed water flows;
 The actual working pressure – which must be higher than the osmotic pressure of the
concentrate;
 The flux through the membrane: flow of water through the membrane, expressed in cubic meter
per square meter of membrane per hour;
 The salt rejection: is a measure of salt or TDS that is rejected by the membrane (not allowed to
go with the permeate).

For a given salinity:


 The higher the feed pressure, the higher will be the recovery rate.
 The higher the temperature, the lower will be the osmotic pressure and salt rejection rate.
 The higher the flux, the higher will be the salt rejection at a constant temperature.

There are several types and sizes of membrane elements from numerous brands available in the market
differentiated by the material composition. These all have different properties.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 54 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
3.2.2 Sea water reverse osmosis plants
RO plants are designed to produce potable quality water either from sea or brackish water.

It is a reliable process, suitable for a wide range of production capacities, well adapted to modular
design; RO plants can be supplied in containerized skids and moved with trailers for a mobile plant
version .

Main aspects of RO plant design depend upon:

 Raw water quality and variability.


 Performances and reliability of the pre-treatment.

Distillation processes based on desalination can cope with significant variations in raw water quality
without major operational issues. However, RO membranes are sensitive to water quality parameters,
for which excess values may affect the performances of the treatment or even damage the membranes.

The design of the pre-treatment process of the feed water is, therefore, the most critical part of RO plant
design. Membrane failures or bad performances are a result of a lack accurate knowledge of the raw
water quality and poor or inappropriate design of the pre-treatment.

The RO performance and energy consumption are directly linked to the salinity of the feed water. Lower
salinity levels require less energy than high salinity levels i.e. brackish water is more energy efficient
per cubic meter of potable water production than sea water.

The “rate of permeate recovery” is an important parameter in an economical system design and the
efficient functioning of the system depends further on the following parameters:

 Energy consumption;
 Feed water consumption;
 Concentrate disposal;
 Permeate salinity and
 Consumption of chemicals.

Problems that arise in RO manifest themselves in two ways:


 Reduction in water flux (production);
 Reduction in salt rejection (permeate high salinity).

The three main causes are:


1. Compaction;
2. Degradation;
3. Fouling/ Scaling.

For RO system sizing:


 Select system parameters resulting in the most cost effective design and economical operation.
 Select the design which will produce the required quantity and quality of permeate at the highest
possible recovery rate.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 55 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Parameters affecting the RO system sizing are:
 Total cost of ownership;
 Permeate recovery rate;
 Flux rate;
 Arrays;
 Type of pretreatment;
 Feed water quality and temperature.

3.2.3 Different stages in RO treatment system


RO water treatment plants in Oman typically consist of the following main process stages:
1. Pre- treatment;
2. Pressurization;
3. Membrane separation;
4. Disinfection;
5. Post treatment process;
6. Pressurization & energy recovery
7. Disinfection, remineralization and pH correction.

3.3 Raw Water Source and Quality


There are basically three types of raw water used for drinking water production through RO in Oman:
 Ground water (brackish water);
 Sea water from beach wells;
 Sea water from direct intake.

Note that - TDS can range from 2,000 to 45,000 mg/l in the above waters influenced by either costal
salinity or local geology.

For the design of an RO plant, it is of high importance to have an accurate knowledge of raw water
quality and its variability. Full water quality analysis should be done for the following:

 Microbiological parameters
 Physical parameters
 Organic and inorganic parameters
 Ionic balance

For design considerations, percentiles are typically used depending on the water quality data set. In
Oman, particular attention must be given to new sources as geology has a significant impact in certain
areas.

In addition to the water quality data, an environmental / catchment survey should be carried out to
identify all potential point and non-point, pollution sources. Mitigation of these issues should be included
in the proposed design. Earlier experience has shown that use of beach wells provides significant
protection against marine algae blooms (red or green tide), jelly fish and seaweeds. The water safety
plan methodology should be followed.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 56 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
3.4 Sea Water Intake and Sea Water Outfall
The detail design report shall include sea water intake as one major hydraulic mechanical and civil
structural unit. The following are some of the factors that shall be considered in detail design:
 Water quality - physical, chemical & biological properties;
 Sea water currents - high tide, low tide;
 Any possible hazards of security and seismic;
 Flora & Fauna in the out-fall area;
 Protection and facilities for desludging, screening & cleaning for unwanted matter entering the
intake;
 Protection against biological growth in the intake chamber and intake pipes;
 Allowance for future expansion of the intake capacity;
 Proper sizing of pumps and drives;
 Mechanical, electrical and instrumentation works for uninterrupted operations.

3.5 Pre-treatment
Seawater intake shall be equipped to alarm and protect for adverse chemicals, phenolic, petroleum or
organic compounds, which can be adversely, affected membranes and the process.

The incoming feed water is pre-treated to be compatible with the water quality specified by the
manufacturers of membranes by removing suspended solids, adjusting the pH, pre-chlorination, de-
chlorination and adding a threshold inhibitor to control scaling resulting from precipitation of various salts
(calcium sulphate, barium sulphate, calcium carbonate).

Design of special treatment process and specifications shall be considered for possible periodical
threats of algae, jellyfish and seaweed, which are being, experienced in existing SWRO plants operating
in Oman.
Redundancy of pre-treatment for uninterrupted operations of the SWRO plant at the full plant capacity
shall be considered.

3.6 Pressurization and Energy Recovery


The application of high-pressure pumps, and ERD with booster raises the pressure of the pre-treated
feed water to an operating pressure appropriate for the membrane and the salinity of the feed water. In
practice, this pressure is higher than the osmotic pressure. The pressurization system may, also, include
the energy recovery device - transferring the energy from the brine concentrate to the feed water.

Separation: two types of membranes are currently used for RO systems:


1. Spiral wound and;
2. Hollow fine fiber membranes.

They are generally made of cellulose acetate, aromatic polyamides, or thin film polymer composites.
Both types are used for brackish water and seawater desalination. The specific membrane type and
size, and the construction of the pressure vessel containing the membrane elements, vary according to
the different operating pressures used for the feed water and the product water quality requirement.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 57 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Any new technologies based on membrane separation can be offered for approval, after full compliance
evaluation.

Disinfection: Although the RO membranes remove (x log) bacteria, viruses and other pathogens if the
process is working correctly, water still needs to be disinfected as a precaution to membrane failure and
other contamination sources and to provide a free residual chlorine during storage, transmission and
distribution.

Remineralization and pH correction: The disinfected permeate requires remineralization and pH


correction with the aim of producing a chemically stable water, and one which is non-corrosive to
materials in the water supply system i.e. metal and concrete. Remineralization may be accomplished
by blending with high mineral content water (typically less than 3% of feed water) followed by
disinfection. pH correction is always the last stage together with disinfection and prior to final water
storage or distribution.

3.7 Pre-treatment Design

3.7.1 Pre-treatment performance


Typical feed water quality after pre-treatment should be within the following indicative ranges and shall
not affect negatively, by any means, the membranes manufacturers’ warranty limits:
 SDI <3
 Organic matter < 1 mg/L
 Turbidity < 0.2 NTU in average, and always less than 0.5 NTU.
 Oil and Fat < 0.1 mg/L
 Oxidants absent
 COD 10 mg/L
 AOC 10 μg/l Ac-C
 BFR 5 pg/cm2 ATP
 Ferrous iron 4 mg/L (pH <6, Oxygen <0.5 ppm)
 Ferric iron 0.05 mg/L
 Manganese 0.05 mg/L
 Aluminum 0.05 mg/L
 Temperature 40 °C

3.7.2 Pre-treatment processes


The design of the pre-treatment depends on the source or raw water characteristics and variability.
A Water Safety Pan study for identifying the risks and mitigation should be carried out when selecting
the preferred option to ensure that any loss of production capacity is acceptable. Cost benefits of the
various options may also be studied:

Option 1 - For good quality sea water, with open intake:


The basic treatment process stages may include:
 Screening;
 Continuous / shock pre-chlorination (to avoid bio fouling). Please note continuous chlorination
is discouraged other than in MSF plants;
 Flash mixing and coagulation with ferric chloride;

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 58 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 First stage dual media (sand and anthracite) filtration in gravity or pressure filters;
 Second stage (if required) dual media filtration.

The two stages of filtration may be replaced by micro-filtration or ultra-filtration; coagulation is always
necessary.

Typical standard design parameters are:


 Retention time in flash mixing coagulation tank: typical minimum is 60 seconds;
 Hydraulic loading on dual media gravity filters: less than 8 m/h – with one filter being
backwashed.

Option 2 - For sea water, with open intake, subject to green or red tides:
If algae blooms present a risk to production as is the case of the coasts of Oman occasionally, dissolved
air floatation facility may be included before the filtration stage as it is easier to ‘float’ algae than to settle
flocs and particulates.

Option 3 – Deep sea intake:


This option aims at mitigating the presence of algae, oils, jelly fish etc., as raw water would typically be
drawn from a depth at which impact would be marginal. Care must be taken on depth, a figure of 10 to
15 meters (draw off 2 to 5 meters above sea bed) at low tide may be a safe depth at which Algal blooms
will not affect the intake. It must be noted that at the end of a bloom, the dead algae (or mass jelly fish
death) may present an issue if they accumulate of the sea bed around an intake structure.
Environmental considerations may prevent this option.

Option 4 - For sea water from submerged sea wells or beach wells and (brackish) ground water:
The raw water coming from submerged sea wells, beach wells and brackish ground water may mitigate
many risks and provide a more secure raw water supply from both a quality and quantity perspective.
Environmental constraints may present limitations. Submerged sea wells, although not currently in
practice in Oman, may be a possible option.

For these options pre-treatment requirements may be much simpler compared to other intake systems.
A simple mechanical filtration with MMF may be enough to reach the required SDI (< 3) for the RO feed.
Best practice is to include a single or multimedia filtration to protect the membranes.

Hydrogen Sulphide is sometimes present in well water (costal or other locations), or even in sea water,
with much decomposing weed in it, if it becomes oxidized it can produce colloidal sulphur, which can
have disastrous effect on membranes.

H2S may be dealt by one or two methods; the feed can be degassed, and then treated with chlorine, if
the feed is hard it may require acid dosing before the degasser.

In many locations, odour control is used to get rid of the gas by air strippers, typical techniques included
counter current scrubbing with sodium hypochlorite or caustic soda.

3.7.3 Chemical conditioning before RO


In addition to the physical processes, pre-treatment must include a series of chemical conditioning of
raw water to get acceptable feed water. The two types of fouling i.e. chemical fouling (e.g. by

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 59 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
carbonates) and organic / biofouling (e.g. bacteria, algae, jellyfish) must be addressed to protect the
membranes and as well as from chemical damage (e.g. by chlorine).

Typical treatments are:


 Shock: pre-chlorination (pre-filtration desalination for organics & biological control; continuous
chlorination is discouraged)
 De-chlorination, by sodium metabisulfite (SMBS) injection (for membrane protection from
chlorine damage)
 pH adjustment: generally, by acid injection (protection for chemical fouling and anti-scalant
ptimisation);
 Anti-scalant injection (typically a phosphate based substance).

The combination of the targeted pH and the anti-scalant requirement is a key parameter of the design,
as it impacts the operational costs. The lower the required feed water pH, the less anti- scalant will be
required. Although it will increase the amount of acid injection required. The choice of the most suitable
anti-scalant depends on the chemical composition of the water, on the brine concentration rate and on
the water temperature. A cost comparison needs to be done between acid (including caustic soda for
pH correction on the permeate) and anti scalant uses.

Pre-treatment for bore hole waters, wells water (brackish water) may include aeration, before
coagulation and flocculation to remove of dissolved gases.

3.8 RO Stage Design

3.8.1 General layout


The RO System includes the following stages:
 Cartridge filters
 Pressure pumps
 RO membranes
 Energy recovery devices
 Booster pumps

RO membranes (elements) are housed in pressure vessels or tubes.


A maximum of 7 or 8 membranes per vessel / tube is considered as reasonable with the existing
available types of membranes. Smaller installation may house 3 or 4 membranes per vessel / tube.

A number of pressures vessels / tubes are installed on skids. One skid can be considered as an
operational unit: all the pressure vessels / tubes of one skid are operated as a single unit i.e. run
together, or washed together.

The number of parallel skids or units is determined as a trade-off between investment costs and
operational flexibility. A plant may be designed such that a capacity upgrade in future can be achieved
by adding an additional skid or unit to a parallel process train.

In general, each skid or unit is fitted with its own high pressure pump and its own energy recovery
device. The modern “pressure center” design is deviating from this concept.

All the above shall be evaluated together with the recommendations of the membrane supplier.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 60 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Number of passes:
To filter out certain special elements, such as Boron, it may be necessary to implement multi successive
passes. In that case, the partial or full permeate flow of the first pass is pumped to a second pass in
order to increase the specific or total salt rejection rate. However, due to a recent relaxation in Boron
limits in both WHO and Omani water quality standards, the full flow second pass application for
adequately removing Boron has become obsolete.
The second pass (if required) can be designed t to treat part of the permeate flow of the first pass only,
depending on the expected efficiency of both passes. In this case, the permeate of the second pass is
blended with the by-pass first pass permeate.

In case a second pass is used, the concentrate of the second pass has generally a low salinity
compared to raw water; therefore, it can be recycled in the feed of the first pass. This must be taken
into account in the general salt balance, when designing the first pass.

Number of stages:
In brackish water, the TDS content of the concentrate may be relatively low. In such a condition, it can
be economical to implement a second stage of reverse osmosis; it consists of sending the concentrate
of the first stage to a second stage of RO membrane, to increase the total recovery rate. Unlike the two
passes configuration, the two stages design does not improve the salt rejection rate, but only the
recovery rate.

3.8.2 Main process parameters

The choice of the membrane type and design of the RO skids are based on the following parameters:
 Salt rejection rate;
 Recovery rate: ratio between the quantity of produced water and the quantity of feed water;
 Feed pressure;
 Flux through the membranes;
 Average age of the membrane;
 Yearly performance decaying rate of the membranes;
 Longitudinal pressure drop;
 Chemical and biological resistance;
 Membrane cleanability.

Salt rejection rate:


The choice of the optimum salt rejection rate depends on the quality of the raw water and on the targeted
standard for the permeate. Drinking water is never “salt free” water: hence, a very high salt rejection is
not always necessary.

The higher is the feed temperature; the lower is the salt rejection rate. For each project, the required
minimum rejection rate must be specified at the higher possible temperature.

Typical figures are:


 For brackish water (TDS is feed water < 3,000 mg/l): rejection rate > 90%;
 For low TDS sea water (mix of brackish and sea water, with TDS around 25,000 mg/l):
rejection rate > 98%;
 For sea water (TDS > 35,000 mg/l): rejection rate > 99%.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 61 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
The membranes are designed for different feed (raw) water characteristics and permeate characteristics
depending on the application.

Feed pressure:
The feed pressure is directly linked to the type of membranes (permeability), and to the targeted
recovery rate, feed TDS and target TDS. Typical figures are:

 Brackish water (TDS < 10,000 mg/l): 12 to 18 bars;


 Sea water (TDS > 35,000 mg/l): 40 bars and above.

The feed pressure changes with the temperature and salinity. High pressure pumps are fitted with VFD
to control within to set pressure limits to protect the membranes.

Impact of age of the membranes:


With the ageing of the membranes, their performances decrease and the required feed pressure for a
steady recovery rate tends to increase. Salt rejection rates tend to decrease.

The actual feed pressure can be assessed against the design feed pressure to give an indication of
deterioration. The expected life span and performance guarantees should be clearly documented so
that on-going performance measurements and assessments can be made so that an early indication of
quantity or quality deterioration can be identified.

Longitudinal pressure drop:


The pressure drop across the membranes is dependent on type and on the number of membranes per
pressure vessel. A standard figure of 1 bar of pressure drop along the entire length of the membrane is
common and acceptable. An increase in the longitudinal pressure drop may be the clue of abnormal
membrane fouling; Cleaning in Place (CIP) is then required to recover the membranes performances.

3.8.3 Energy recovery device

The pressure of the concentrate at the outlet of the membranes is equal to the feed pressure minus the
longitudinal pressure drop. This represents a considerable amount of hydraulic energy, which must not
be wasted.

Three technologies are in use in recovering this energy:


 Turbo-pumps turbines including Francis and Pelton types;
 Pressure exchanger include ERI and DWEER types.

The best recovery efficiency is achieved with work exchangers. A design efficiency of more than 95%
may be achieved. The benefits of energy recovery devices are less on low TDS brackish water RO
processes.

3.8.4 Cleaning in Place (CIP)


Even with a correct pre-treatment and anti-scalant injection, the performances of the membranes tend
to decrease due to the fouling and scaling mechanisms. Recovery back to design membrane
performances by chemical cleaning (without dismantling the membranes) should be carried out in

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 62 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
accordance with manufactures recommendations. It is not good practice to skip cleans which are
typically required on a three-month basis. Although marginal deterioration in performance may be seen
over a short time period, the rate of fouling becomes exponential. There is a point of no return, at which
the membranes cannot be recovered, leading to premature replacement of membranes. Failure to
recover membranes to an acceptable level can also indicate changes in raw water quality, which can,
in some instances, mean that the anti-scalant being used is no longer effective and needs changing.

Membranes cleaning is usually performed with the following kinds of chemicals:


 Citric acid;
 Caustic soda;
 NaDDS (Sodium dodecyl sulphate);
 Hydrochloric acid;
 Ammonia;
 EDTA.

The waste solution from CIP must be neutralized before disposal. Disposal requirements in Oman are
legislated under various environmental laws.

3.9 Post Treatment Design

3.9.1 Final disinfection

Final disinfection can be achieved by injecting gaseous chlorine or solutions from on-site-electrolytic-
chlorine (OSEC) generation system, sodium hypochlorite liquid or calcium hypochlorite (powdered
made up into a solution).

Each type of chlorination system has pros and cons. A significant concern is for safety of the operator
and local community. Prime importance is ensuring that the water is successfully disinfected, and free
from disease causing organisms. It is equally important to maintain a free chlorine residual into the
water supply system to maintain a healthy water to the customer tap.

 To ensure the appropriate Concentration x Contact Time (CT) values are achieved;
 To control within 0.1 mg/l of the required set point (after a period of stabilisation);
 To dose within the range of 0.2 mg/l and 1 mg/l;
 To have alarms to identify loss of disinfection and excess dosage;
 To ensure disinfection is carried out AFTER blending for re-mineralisation (if in place);
 To ensure disinfection is carried out BEFORE pH correction. (or alternative arrangement by
agreement only if CT values and log inactivation are achieved within the process constraints).

3.9.2 Remineralisation and correction of pH

After the retention of the HCO3- and CO3 ions by the membrane, the pH of the permeate must typically
be corrected.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 63 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
The goal of remineralization and pH correction is to reach the calco-carbonic equilibrium expressed by
the Langellier Saturation Index having a value equal to 0 or slightly positive (0 to 0.2), while slightly
increasing Hardness and Alkalinity levels.

Depending upon the characteristics of the raw water and the pre-treatment process applied, there may
be an excess or deficit of CO2 content in the permeate water.

In the case of brackish water with low salinity, it is recommended to carry out:
 Aeration in order to raise the pH;
 An additional pH correction, by injection of lime water or caustic soda.

If there is a deficit of CO2 in the permeate (which is generally the case with sea water), the chemical
post treatment would comprise the following:
 CO2 injection;
 Final pH correction, by injection of lime water and caustic soda.

In case lime is injected, this should be in lime water form (maximum concentration: 1.5 to 2.0 g/l) and
never in lime slurry form, as slurry can significantly raise the turbidity of the product water. To obtain the
lime water, a settling and decanting stage in a “saturator tank” is required.

Hardness, Alkalinity and pH can also be increased while reaching the calco-carbonic equilibrium in
limestone dissolving filters. Prior to entering these hardening filters, CO2 shall be injected to the water
to enhance the limestone dissolving process. The application of limestone filters is a good alternative
to the injection of lime water. A proper selection of the limestone material quality is crucial.

3.10 Chemicals Handling, Storage, Preparation and Dosing

The types and quantities of chemicals used within the RO plant depends on the characteristics of the
raw water and on the design of the plant.

The reliability of the operation, the consistency of the treated water quality and the life of the membranes
are directly linked to the accuracy of the chemical’s dosage, which depends on a proper monitoring of
the injection pumps, a precise preparation of the solutions, and a good management of the chemicals
stock.

Health, safety and environmental laws and international best practice MUST be followed. A HAZOP
(Hazard identification and mitigation) review should be carried out as a part of the design process.

Examples include:
 The condition of chemicals storage: easiness of access for delivery, sufficient handling
equipment (cranes, monorail, forklift, etc.) for heavy bags and drums, safety provisions
(retention bunds) in case of leakage of spillage;
 Chemical solution preparation: transfer, make up, transfer, storage volumes and containment;
 Chemical dosing: duty / standby dosing pumps (rotational operation), secondary containment
of dosing lines, catch pots and calibration pots.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 64 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
3.11 Chemical Waste Disposal

Chemical waste from RO plants includes commissioning wastes, pre-treatment chemicals, cleaning
chemicals and post treatment chemicals, as wells as emergency disposal of chemical leaks, etc.

Typical methods of disposal are:


 Lined evaporation ponds;
 Deep well injection;
 Disposal after neutralization in surface bodies;
 Mixed with the brine stream in sea outfalls (dispersal characteristics and environmental impact
assessment study would need to meet Oman & International best practice requirements /
objectives).
 Concentration into solid salts

3.12 Instrumentation and Control

The level of instrumentation and automation will depend on the size of the plant. The minimum of on-
line instrumentation must be implemented, for a correct and steady operation of the plant. This should
include:

Raw Water:
 Temperature;
 pH;
 Turbidity;
 Flow;
 Flowmeter;
 Discharge pressure;
 Conductivity;
 Chlorine dosage;
 Post filtration turbidity;
 Post filtration chlorine;
 Differential pressure MMF/CF.

Feed Water (location dependent on chemical application):


 ORP;
 Residual Cl2;
 pH;
 Temperature;
 Pressure;
 Conductivity;
 Flow;
 Permeate pressure;
 Anti scalant dosage concentrate;
 PX feed water flow;
 PX feed pressure;

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 65 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 PX outlet water flow;
 PX outlet water pressure.

Permeate:
 Concentrate pressure;
 Conductivity;
 pH;
 Flow.

Treated Water:
 pH;
 Residual free chlorine;
 Flow;
 Discharge flow & applicable quality instruments.

Parameters for high pressure pump and for booster pump after PX:
 Water flow;
 Suction pressure;
 Discharge pressure;
 VFD control signal.

If the RO system is a 2 staged system, the following instrumentation should be on each stage:
 RO feed pressure;
 RO concentrate pressure;
 RO permeate flow;
 RO permeate pressure;
 RO permeate conductivity.

All instrumentation must be fitted with data logging and out of range alarm management systems for
local operational control & management.
The requirements for instrumentation, control and automation will be detailed in a separate document.
All instruments should have a digital output, with sufficient de-bounce for manual logging purposes.
All instruments should have supplies in accordance with manufactures equipment recommendations
e.g. dual (shared) feed water supplies may not be suitable in some cases.
All instruments should be clearly labelled.
Process flow diagrams and P&ID’s must be provided with full detail of process stage conditions and
criteria.

Other subsystems and components in the RO plant:


 Chemical dosing system.
 CIP system.
 Power supply HV, MV and LV primary substation.
 SCADA and DCS control system and data management.
 HVAC and service water network.
 Sewerage and effluent treatment system.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 66 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
CHAPTER 4 PUMPING STATION

Chapter 4 describes the pumping station requirements to fulfill intended quality for a water

supply system. The guideline shows the general design requirements for pumping station, hydraulic

calculations, pump design and intended performance.

This chapter is a standalone chapter and shall be read in line with the requirements of other chapters within this

document “Integrated Water Supply System” as well as with the other publications by Diam e.g. manuals, standard

specifications and drawings.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 67 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
4.1 Introduction
The purpose of this document is to provide a brief guideline for design of pumping stations. It aims to
provide a standardized guide containing requirements relating to the detail design of potable water
pumping stations and avoid variability in designs and keep improving overall the efficiency of new
pumping stations.

The principle goals of the design are to ensure that the water pumping station is functional, reliable, fit
for purpose, cost effective, able to maintain, future upgradations and complies with the requirements of
Diam, shown in Table 4.1. In principle, pumping systems shall:

1. Fulfil the design criteria.


2. Comply with Omani regulatory guidelines & HSE requirements.
3. Minimize energy consumption by efficient operation.
4. Have reliable and long service life with minimal maintenance and least whole of life cost. Life
time for non-structural mechanical installations shall be considered as 20 years.
5. Provide buildings & services, access roads, sewerage and wastewater drainage as per relevant
international standards & Omani standards.
6. Provide infrastructure for operation and maintenance staff where necessary.

Table 4.1. Planning and design factors for water pumping stations.

Factors Requirements
 Efficiently deliver water from a defined extraction system to an
appropriate receiving system.
 Pump a range of flows from minimum to maximum of present and
future demands with a number of duty, duty assisted and standby
pumps.
 Have minimum visual impact.
Functionality
 Incorporate remote monitoring, control and telemetered alarms.
 Provide safe working conditions for operation and maintenance
personnel.
 Satisfy Public Authority for Civil Defense and Ambulance (PACDA)
requirements.

 Primary substation, HV/MV/LV power DBs and major power


Pumping station
demand points (pumps) & ground reservoirs to be ideally located so
layout
that OPEX, CAPEX are optimized.

Design options &


 Cost optimization by a CAPEX & OPEX comparison at NPV values.
value Engineering
 Be designed for minimal operator attendance and low maintenance.
 Be easily maintained using standard maintenance practices.
 Incorporate features to allow for flexibility of operation.
Maintainability
 Utilize standard components that are readily available and
interchangeable.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 68 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Factors Requirements
 Operate reliably, effectively and automatically with alarms, stop/start
switches etc., i.e. normally unattended.
Reliability  Have redundancy so that failure of any one item shall not cause total
failure of pump station.
 Incorporate adequate security measures.
Cost optimization  Mechanical equipment for direct and assisting for operations.

HAZOP  HAZOP study, Risk level and mitigated risk level.

4.1.1 Basis of design report drawings


The Diam preliminary / concept design team or TOR normally develops the pre-design report for the
detail design works. The DESIGN CONSULTANT shall develop the Basis of Design Reports in
accordance with project specific requirements and the Diam guidelines.

4.1.2 Design specifications


The DESIGN CONSULTANT shall produce Standard, General and Particular Specifications, necessary
to meet the requirements of each project, and develops any required additional sections. Equipment
specifications prepared by DESIGN CONSULTANT avoid sole source equipment requirements and
ensure competitive pricing for major equipment to be supplied by the Construction Contractor, such as
pumps, motors, SCADA & instrumentation, hypochlorite generation plants, emergency power
generation equipment, etc.

4.1.3 Design drawings


The DESIGN CONSULTANT develops detail design drawings to meet the needs of each project. The
drawings must conform to the requirements of the Diam Standards. Drawing are to be compatible with
GIS and asset requirements.

4.1.4 Future expansion/upgradation


Pumping station is to be designed expandable in future demands. The design consultant shall ensure
that adequate space is provided to accommodate the installation of future pump(s) and allied equipment
(including surge suppression) for smooth expandability. The suction and discharge header pipework
shall be sized and arranged to accommodate future flows without having to take the pumping station
out of service when expansion is required. If it appears to be impractical or uneconomical to construct
the pumping station building to house future pump(s), the design consultant shall submit a comparative
evaluation of cost, operability and constructability issues at appropriate design stage. This evaluation
address alternative means of providing the desired capacity to meet future capacity requirements.
Based on this analysis, Diam may direct the design consultant before proceeding with final design of
pumping station relative to future expansion / upgradation.

4.1.5 Phasing of pump station design


A realistic design period shall be opted based on different indicators such as the increase in population,
demand, strategic development projects and financial capabilities. Accordingly, the exercise of pump
station phasing shall be carried out. For instance, the design period is 25 years; two phasing can be
planned. Phase -1 for the period of the first 15 years and second phase shall be started at the end of
15 years and cater to the requirements until the end of the design period.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 69 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
The required design capacity (both the initial phase and future phase), including the maximum, average,
and minimum flows to be pumped and shall be considered when selecting the type and size of
equipment layout.

For transmission pumps, the following shall be followed:


1. The station layout should permit plans for periodic increases in demand.
2. If applicable, pumping higher flow with higher discharge pressure by increasing VFD speed by
15-20%.
3. If head and flow are expected to change significantly over the years, choose pumps with
medium-sized impellers so that impellers only – not pumps- need to be changed to match the
flow.

For booster pump station the following shall be followed:


- In the case of booster pumps in the distribution network, carefully consider the maximum daily
and hourly flow rates or the requirements for firefighting flow at an interim period of 5 years
regular intervals.
- The normal demand shall be served with one duty pump while peak demand shall be served
with two or three duty pumps.
- The expected sustained minimum flow is crucial as it shall dictate (1) the size and number of
pumps, and (2) special considerations by the pump manufacturer in selecting pumps
- Frequent and extended operation at rates of flows below the minimum manufacturer’s
recommendation could result in serious damage.
- Limit the number of pump sizes. To reduce the inventory of spare parts, one size is best. Two
sizes are acceptable in exceptional cases.

The above considerations shall be considered whilst arriving pump station size, besides a balanced
approach to be made against initial cost and requirements. In some instances, instead of installing
smaller impellers, the best solution may be to install small pumps initially and to replace them at some
future date with larger equipment instead of adding more pumps. Note that the largest capacity cost
item is the civil structure itself. In most instances, minimizing the number of pumps minimizes the capital
cost of the station. If smaller pumps are used initially, the suction and discharge connections should be
sized properly for the future units. Hence, whilst designing the structure, various options shall be worked
out in such a way that in future, expansion can be made without affecting the pump station operation,
as much as possible. Use reducers as necessary for the small original units. Full-size drivers and
starting equipment may be preferable for the initial pumping equipment. In any event, the designer shall
remember to allow space for future equipment and plan how these will be installed in future.

4.2 Design of Pumping Station

4.2.1 General recommendations


The architectural design should harmonize with the surrounding environment and respect the natural
landscape as far as reasonably practicable.

The foundations of structures depend on the results of geotechnical investigation. Usually, the structure
is of reinforced concrete, steel and masonry construction.

The building should be designed considering both the initial requirement and the potential need for
space to accommodate future equipment for expansion.

The impact of noise on houses or other buildings near the station must be considered.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 70 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Windows should not be included in unattended locations or chemical storage including chlorine gas.

All equipment must be installed or built in such a way that flooding or other spillages cannot jeopardize
the operation or running of such equipment. All electrical panels must also meet these requirements to
prevent failure or electrocution.

Floors should slope to a sump fitted with a pump. The floor should be non-slippery to avoid accidents.

Welfare needs of operators, operations / maintenance, cleaning and security of employees should be
considered in the design. In line with MD 286, the design team must carry out an assessment of all
potential hazards during construction and operation phases. This must include a risk assessment
detailing the future requirements for firefighting, manual handling, electrics, lone working, confined
spaces, chemical control etc. Diam HSE is to be consulted at all stages of the design.

4.2.2 Pump station types


Diam operates a wide range of pumping stations of different configurations and capacities. A number
of these are major pumping stations, most of which draw potable water from reservoir and pump to
service reservoirs/elevated tanks. The pumping stations are located strategically within the transmission
or distribution system. The pumps less than 100 kW in distribution systems may designed for pump
stations that are monitored by the operators in control room at the nearest main pump station.

These pumps are designed to operate by motor drives of fixed speed or variable speed and shall be
according to TET-SS-5057 Centrifugal Pumps for Water Transmission.

All pump stations shall contain duty, duty assisted and standby pumps. All pumps shall be sized to
deliver up to the maximum design demand and shall be identical. Standby pump is programmed to
operate in the event that the duty or duty assisted pump out of service. Major pumping stations may
have more than two pumps but will always incorporate a standby pump(s).

This document is a guide only and sound engineering judgement must be applied at all times. It remains
the designer’s responsibility for all aspects of the design and the designer must justify any variation from
these guidelines and duly recommended by Water Utility.

4.2.3 Components of pump station


A pumping station should have at least the minimum but not limited to below:
 Pump hall room and pump piping arrangement;
 Pumps house dewatering and waste water pumps;
 Pipe supports, thrust blocks and any structural components required for safe operations and
performance of the pumps;
 Location of surge vessel and associated equipment;
 Overhead cranes / hoist / monorails;
 Control room (optional);
 Walkways, safety railings, protections for rotating elements;
 Access platforms and ladders for O&M;
 Ventilation and dust protection for pump room;

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 71 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 HV/MV/LV Electrical and switch gear room;
 Automation room;
 Battery room;
 Firefighting and industrial safety requirements;
 Office (Optional);
 Maintenance and workshop facilities (Optional);
 Storage for spare parts and equipment (Optional);
 Storage for chemical and substances (Optional);
 Welfare facilities (including PPE changing area);
Building design should consider for minimizing reverberation sound fields, isolation of vibrations to steel
works and sound levels to be less than 87 dB (A).

4.2.4 Site infrastructure

The location of a pumping station is strongly influenced by hydraulic considerations so that the pumps
and pipeline operate satisfactorily under the design demand conditions. Adequate positive
suction/flooded suction is preferred. A detail study of the transmission & distribution scheme with options
for favorable energy–economic efficiency shall be the procedure of determining the optimal location of
storage & pump stations can reduce cost of electricity.
The use of intermediary pump stations integrated on distribution mains has the advantages of making
the pressure uniform in large networks, avoiding the zones with exaggerated high pressure.

The choice of site is usually determined by the system requirements, land availability, availability of
electrical infrastructures and aesthetic conditions, but the location should allow for a suitable layout for
the incoming and outgoing water mains. Factors shown in Table 4.2 shall be considered during the site
selection process. There should also be sufficient clearance from surface and subsurface obstructions
to allow for construction. Sites located under electrical power lines should be avoided. Consideration
should also be given to the potential likelihood of future development.

To ensure the proposed pumping station location and layout are acceptable, the site shall be approved
in advance by Diam during concept/preliminary design stage. Pump pedestal level or building floor,
electrical transformers/ pad mounted substation or emergency generator are to be located above
maximum flood level, with the floors being a minimum of 300 mm above the 1:50 year flood level. The
design consultant should fully acquire the site info and metrological data during the preliminary/detailed
design stage; properly design the surface/stormwater management considering the 1:50 ARI.

The size of a major pumping station is primarily depending upon the ground reservoir, 33/11 kV Primary
substation, MV/LV electrical room, number of pumps (present + future) and yard pipe works. In most
cases, pumping station is associated within the reservoir compound, which is located adjacent to road
or at mountain (Jabel). If the pumping station is to be located adjacent to road, its entry and exit position
should be determined in conjunction with the Ministry of Transport and ROP. As much as possible, it
shall be located away or far apart from the residential area and sensitive areas like hospitals, Mosques,
etc.

If the pump station is situated adjoined to Jabel, suitable protection measures to be considered to protect
the pump station from unstable boulders / loose soil that may fall from jabel.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 72 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
During preliminary design stage, the design Consultant should consult with the various regional
stakeholders like MoH, Ministry of Heritage and Culture, power distribution companies, Municipality,
MoT, all telecom providers, PDO, OGC, ROP, Falaj crossings, etc. This should be commended early
stage of project as getting approvals/NOC can become prolonged that directly affects/delay the
commencement of project execution unintentionally. Consideration must be given to key issues
associated with the project and relevant stakeholders associated with these issues and bring to the
notice of Diam as and when required.

Copies of relevant approvals from authorities/stake holders shall be included in the detailed design
report shall be annexed with the Tender Documents.

Table 4.2. Factors to guide in site selection.

Location Factors Requirements


 Must be located within the plot, ownership of which is
dedicated to Diam including the easements.
 Provide all weather access road to pumping station for routine,
emergency operation and normal maintenance activities.
 Power facilities should be available or able to be economically
Site selection provided to the site.
 Site should have safe access and consideration should be
given to construction requirements.
 If it is located within the reservoir compound, the external pipe
works should not affect/hurdle the future compound expansion
and its pipe works.
 Provision of sufficient buffer from nearby existing built-up
areas and future developments
Amenity and environment
 Adequate entry and exit shall be provided with ascending and
descending bay in consult with MoT and ROP
 Proximity to pipeline and reservoirs
Design  Accessibility
 Site slope and soil conditions
 Ensure that adequate storm water management drainage from
the pumping station and site including access roads is
Flooding designed so that flooding of the facility is avoided.
 The pumping station site, electrical infrastructures, access
road shall not be liable to flooding during a 1 in 50 year ARI
 In conjunction with determining the requirements for the site
infra-structure, the designer shall consider the requirements
for supporting systems to enable efficient and safe operation
of the pumping station, as Requirements follows:
o Electrical power and on site generator (if required)
o HVAC systems
Supporting Systems
o security
o fire alarm with fire-fighting facilities
o SCADA
o Adequate Turning radius for maneuvering of maintenance
vehicle
o Access road and compound lighting

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 73 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
4.2.5 Access road
An access is to be provided from the closest public road to the pumping station. Where access from a
public road is not available then a suitable access road shall be created. The design of the access road
shall reflect the size and operating requirements maintenance vehicles. The road shall be an all
weather-sealed road and have a suitable turning area for a 5 tons maintenance truck or as required for
a larger vehicle. The minimum road width shall be as stated below with local widening as required at
bends. Allowance for the parking of two 5t trucks shall be provided adjacent to the pumping station.

Minimum access road requirements:


• Minimum pavement width 5 meters
• Desirable maximum grade 12.5%
• Preferred cross fall 3%

The access road shall be designed in one of the following materials:


1. Concrete pavement
2. Compacted gravel pavement with two coat bitumen seal

The surfacing of the pumping station site and access road is site specific.

4.2.6 Access and protection


The protection of access to water facilities is important. Metal fences must be provided to prevent
trespassing, theft and from act of domestic and non-domestic aggression.

The following elements could be installed:


 Secured hatch, doors or covers to direct access points;
 Direct access door to the pumping station or technical room(s);
 Ventilation grilles;
 Access ladders.

Pumping stations are normally completely enclosed by high fences. These could be of the chain-link or
iron railings type, depending on architectural requirements and risk level. Alternatively, a masonry wall
could be constructed to meet architectural requirements.

The security fence is generally adjacent to the property line. Each site should have a boundary/
perimeter fence, which should comply with regulations and Diam’s security and HSE Policy.

4.2.7 Materials of construction


The design/supervision/project management consultant shall adopt careful materials selection
based on application, design, worst environmental conditions and protection measures to minimize
material degradation and frequent maintenance.

Preferably, approved products and suppliers registered with Diam shall be used.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 74 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
4.2.8 Pump station building
Diam pumping station buildings shall primarily consist of RCC framed structure, RCC floor and cavity
block wall construction with RCC flat roof. In some cases, the roof shall be metal roofing. The building
sizing shall consider the followings:
1. Working heights for the selected pumps type;
2. Working area for pipe work and access to operation & maintenance of valves,
instrumentations etc.;
3. Future expansion of pumping capacity;
4. Consider to optimize sound level less than 87 dB (A) of reverberating noise field at the
entrance doors for operator-assisted pumps;
5. Appropriate layouts for equipment, flow velocities inside piping and appropriate structures for
buildings must be devised in the detail design stage;
6. The length of the reservoir outlet pipe to the suction manifold of the pump station shall be
with minimum possible number of bends and total pipe length.

4.2.9 Access and maintenance


All equipment should have horizontal and vertical clearances to allow for repairs and maintenance to
be carried out efficiently and safely. Pumps, motors and equipment should be installed after finishing
civil works.

Stepped platforms should be installed if necessary to access equipment.

If the pumping station has different floor levels, stairs and safety railings should be installed. To avoid
the need to climb over pumps, motors or pipes, stairway shall be provided to provide access to all sides
of pump and motor. Where required, lifting equipment specific to fitting new parts must meet all HSE
requirements.

4.2.10 Overhead hoist


If temporary or portable hoisting is not practical, crane rails and electrical hoists should be installed for
maintenance or repair works. These should cover all heavy equipment and allow for offloading of trucks,
etc.

Hoists should be designed so that the equipment located inside can easily be taken outside for heavy
maintenance or replacement. It is required to provide parking bay for the overhead hoist for its
maintenance works. Hoists must be marked and included in routine inspections by the relevant
competent authority, which shall be conducted annually for the hoist and every 6 months for hoist
equipment i.e. chains, straps, strop, hooks, shackles and D rings.

It is recommended that in case of constraints for space in small pump houses the design engineer shall
opted for monorail or tripod facilities for maintenance of pumps and fittings, which are of excessive
weight for safety of workers and equipment.

4.2.11 Hydraulic equipment & instrumentation


A typical pumping station has at least the following equipment and that shown in Figure 4.1.Motor
Operated Valves (gate valves, and butterfly valves) with electrical actuators;
 Non-return valves

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 75 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 Pumps temperature and vibration sensors;
 Motors temperature and vibration sensors;
 Motors electrical protection;
o overload relay
o low/high voltage relay
 Pressure gauges;
 Surge vessels (bladder/air compressor type);
o level transmitter
o level switch
o level gauge
o pressure transmitter
o pressure gauge
o pressure switch
o surge control system with HMI
 Anti-ram / surge tank;
 Air compressor (depends on type of surge vessel);
 Secondary or post chlorination (optional);
 Online water quality monitoring (optional);
 Sampling points (on inlet and outlet);
 Flowmeter(s);
 Pressure transmitters;
 By-pass for booster stations only.

Figure 4.1. Schematic layout of a pumping station.

 If pumping station is feeding directly water network, it is preferred to have water network
pressure transmitter be equipped with the pumping station to ease water flow and pressure
control.
 If pumping station feeding reservoir(s), level transmitters & discharge flowmeter signals to be
available in pumping station.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 76 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
4.2.12 Pipework arrangement and valving
All pipework within the pump station is to be tested to the structural integrity and leaks test. The test
pressure is to be prescribed by the design consultant and is to consider operating conditions
(present/future), surge and shut off head. In addition, within the pump station building, the following pipe
arrangement and valving are common:
a) Suction manifold & pipework
b) Delivery manifold & pipework
c) Miscellaneous fittings

a) Suction manifold & pipework


The suction manifold should be sized according to the maximum flow demand, including future flow
demands, if any with a velocity limit of 0.9 m/s. The branches from this manifold to the individual pumps
are to be similarly sized according to the range of flows for the pumps and shall be less than 1.5 m/s.
Branch outlets should be at 30 to 45 degrees relative to main-line flow rather than 90 degrees.

The flow is to be directed into the suction of the pumps in a uniform manner without turbulence.
Valves, tapers and changes of direction or pipe section are to be no closer than five times of pipe
diameters upstream of the pump suction intake. Minimize head loss and turbulence, the use of long-
radius bends in both suction and discharge piping is strongly recommended.

Inlet tapers (reducers) are to be eccentric, with the invert horizontal in order to prevent an air pocket
developing. The sides of all tapers are to be straight and the taper is to be gradual with an included
angle not greater than 15 degrees (i.e. butt weld tapers are not to be used on the suction).

The inlet pipe which connects directly to the pump is to be horizontal, straight and of the same
internal diameter as the pump inlet and of three pipe diameters in length. Puddle flanges are to be
incorporated to take thrust on suction pipework when passing through a wall.

b) Discharge manifold & pipework


The common delivery manifold is to be sized 1.0 m/s and individual discharge pipework of a pump
is to be sized in order to allow for maximum flow velocity less than 2 m/s. The maximum flow shall
consider future demand flows, if any, through the pipeline within a velocity limit of 2.0 m/s.

Tapers used on the pump delivery may be concentric or eccentric but are to be straight sided.

Delivery pipe work is to be restrained so that there is no loading back onto the pump flange. Puddle
flanges are to be incorporated to take thrust on delivery pipework when passing through a wall. It
shall be considered bellow coupling where the stress travelling to pumps can be isolated. Design
engineer shall perform a CFD analysis for the pipe work including supports and anchors in the design
report.

c) Miscellaneous fittings
 Isolation valves are installed on suction and discharge pipes, and, by-pass pipelines;
 The discharge valve(s) should be modulating type and motorized and suction valve shall be
manually operated;
 Washout, air release, air vacuum release or combination of air release and vacuum valves are
to be provided at critical locations in the pumping station piping.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 77 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Tapping points for pressure monitoring should be installed at the suction and delivery sides of each
pump as well as on the common header of suction and discharge with isolation ball cock valves.

a. Non-return valve (NRV)


In Diam, the most commonly used non-return valve (non-slam) are swing flap type, tilting disc, dual
plate, and axial flow type etc. NRV shall be provided on pump delivery side. Preferably, NRV shall
be mounted in horizontal sections of pipe rather than vertical pipe. NRV is installed upstream of the
delivery side isolation valve.

b. Dismantling joint
A dismantling joint is to be provided adjacent to at least one pump flange to allow removal and re-
installation of the pump without significantly disturbing the pipework. As a minimum, the dismantling
joint is to connect the straight section of inlet pipe to the inlet flange of the pump. Flange thicknesses
are to be rated for the test pressure of the system.

c. Pressure gauges
Pressure gauges (digital and analog) are both required to measure the pipeline suction and delivery
manifold pressures. Tapping points complete with ball type isolation valves are to be located on
suitable locations.
Each pump shall be equipped with individual suction and discharge pressure gauges installed as
per OEM manual.

d. Flowmeter
The flowmeter is to record all pumped flows; an electromagnetic flow meter is to be installed at the
common delivery pipe only.

The flowmeter is to be located on the common transmission pipe within the pump house or inside a
chamber. The flowmeter shall ideally be installed with reducers, dismantling joints and necessary
couplings in such a manner no less than 5 clear pipe diameters upstream and a minimum of 3 clear
pipe diameters downstream from any disturbance (for example, valve, tee, bend, change of direction
etc.) in the pipework. The flowmeter is to be flanged and sized as per the manufacturer’s
recommendation (i.e. no tapers are to be used) so that the inside diameter of the flow meter matches
that of the pipework. At least one of the pipe flanges joining the flowmeter must be a dismantling
joint to the flow.

The signal converter and LCD unit are to be located above the flowmeter and readings displayed in
flow rate (m3/h) and cumulative total flow (m3/h). Where the flowmeter is used for control purposes,
it is important to specify the required flow range. The flow rate reading shall be sent to local control
room as well as to regional SCADA control station.

Flowmeters are to be installed according to manufacturer’s instructions and shall incorporate earth
connections as required by the manufacturer.

e. Thrust restraint fittings


The design consultant is responsible for the provision of adequate thrust restraint. Pipework, fittings
and anchorages (including straps, puddle flanges and thrust blocks) must be able to sustain
maximum pressures, including surge.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 78 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Thrust restraint for pipework can also be achieved by the use of thrust-restrained type dismantling
joints. The use of adapter type flange is not permitted. Within the pumping station, particular care is
to be taken to ensure that there is no loading onto the pump flanges caused by poor installation or
pressure generated forces as this can cause distortion of the pump body and lead to premature
failure of components such as mechanical shaft seals. The pump is not to be used to support the
pipework. Flexible jointed pipes and fittings are to be adequately restrained. Flange thicknesses are
to be rated for the test pressure of the system.

Where an existing pumping station is being upgraded, pipe pressure class, thrust restraint and
possible fatigue of existing reticulation pipes due to cyclic loading must be checked.

4.2.13 Disinfection
Water quality studies are necessary to choose the type of disinfection, its installation, control storage,
handling and transport requirements.
For the disinfection see CHAPTER 9 of this design guidelines.

4.2.14 HVAC system


Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) shall be provided to protect against heating
equipment, and will be either air conditioning, heat extraction or a mixture of both and shall be designed
for internal (motor, lighting, etc.) and external loads (structure, climatic conditions). A specific ventilation
study is required for each installation, building, occupants, etc.

Heating and cooling loads should be calculated in accordance with the procedures outlined in the latest
edition of American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
Handbook of Fundamentals.

The following shall be considered:


 Optimizing power by using inverters compressors;
 Capacitors corrected fan units;
 Energy optimized system controls for operations;
 Application of insulations where necessary;
 Mechanical protection for refrigerant piping, control and electrical cabling;
 Proper location of HVAC units is the responsibility of the design engineer. Installations related
to HVAC shall not develop operation difficulties in other equipment and switchgears;
 Remote air flow and temperature control units;
 Number of air changes for specific areas – as per OSHA guidelines;
 Recommended pressure to provides positive pressure within the building, the amount of outdoor
air should be increased to approximately 105 percent of the amount exhausted or be balanced
to give a positive gauge building pressure difference of 2 mm to 4 mm of water.
 Standby duty arrangement where standby capacity shall consider criticality of the equipment to
protect against overheating. Generally, 50% to 75% of the capacity.
 Developing a proper engineering drawing with location detail for each major HVAC item is the
responsibility of the detail design engineer.
 Sound level shall be less than 60 dB (A) at 1 m below the air outlet units, ambient temperature,
RH to be considered for weather cycle of 25 years maximum and shall be considered in the

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 79 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
specifications for the system design. The detail design engineer shall develop the required type
of HVAC system and required specifications.

The Air Conditioning units shall be air-cooled condensers either


 Split units;
 Duct system with AHU.

Various safety devices are used to prevent:


 Failures due to overheating of motors
 Refrigerant liquid control for safety of compressors
 Pressure safety units for pressure pipes.
 High pressure switches
 Air cleaning and disinfecting units
 Shut down of air flows in duct systems during fire detection alarms.

4.2.15 SCADA
The SCADA and Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) shall supervise, monitor and control the
pumping station. For more detailed information of control and automation, refer latest version of
CHAPTER 8 .

All the data shall be collected from the different units and transferred to the Regional Control Room.

The following represents the basic minimum, which should be monitored in the SCADA system.
 Electrical actuated valves: open, intermediate, closed, % opening;
 Pump: start, stop, running, trip;
 Pressure alarm: low, high, normal;
 Pump temperature control;
 Pump discharge control;
 Pump operation mode (automatic/manual);
 Vibration sensors;
 Pressure control;
 Level: Low, high, normal;
 Water quality parameters;
 Energy consumption for each pump;
 Number of hours in operation (for maintenance);
 Flood alarm;
 Doors access control;
 Situation of electrical power;
 Historic.

The following indicators shall be present in fault inquiry status:


 MCC/Local;
 Auto Stop/ Auto Running;
 Auto Trip;
 Fault/ Out of service;
 Manual Stop/Manual Running.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 80 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
4.2.16 Electrical equipment
For the fixed speed pump, soft starter should be installed.

For the variable speed motor, VFD should be installed.

All electrical panels, switchgear and electrical control equipment should be located in the electrical room.
Good visibility of panels is necessary, as is proper warning and danger signage on the equipment. The
electrical panels should have at least 30% extra capacity for future extension. The indicators for
running/stop/fault shall be provided for all pumps and status of controls for the motor controls, soft
starters, VFD & breakers. It shall be considered, as well, for fault detecting test lamp for easy detection
of faults.

Every electrical panel shall be equipped with command buttons with three positions (manual, automatic
and stop).

The main parameters such as power, power factor, power totalizer, voltage, current, temperature, hour
running meter, etc. should be displayed.

The electrical equipment room shall be separated from pump room. It either could be in a separate
building or physically separated from the pump room by a structurally sound dividing wall with a viewing
pane. Normally the second internal door to the room should have no windows. This room must be air-
conditioned.

Emergency push isolation button or dead man’s switch should be provided.

The general electric supply must be dual and able to take a permanent or a temporary standby
generator. Switch over arrangements, automatic or manual, need to be decided.

Voltage electrical cells should be equipped with an automatic restart system.

The power supplied to the pumping station should have the capacity to run all the pumps including
stand-by pump if needed.

Electric connection point from distribution companies shall be according to the requirements of the
electricity provider. The designer shall share electric demand with the distribution company and check
the responsibility of design and construction of the connection point.

Un-interrupted power supply with battery room shall detailed for PLC; SCADA system and shall be of
minimum 4 hours of operations.

4.2.17 Emergency power


Pumping stations should be equipped with an emergency un-interrupted power supply with sufficient
capacity to provide electric output in case of main power failure.

4.2.18 Fire protection


After checking the PACDA requirements, the following fire detection/suppression systems should be
installed: heat/ smoke detection in all rooms. Suitable fire extinguishing / suppression appropriate to the
installed equipment and size of the site. For example, CO2 for all electrical equipment, dry powder for

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 81 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
generators and foam for fires on liquid fuels and oils. Alarm should be both, audible on site and relay
back to the operations center.

4.2.19 Health, safety and environmental requirements


a) HAZOP study
Detail engineering team shall produce a comprehensive HAZOP study report with possible hazards and
individual risk levels, mitigation actions and resulting risk levels.
All recommended mitigation actions shall be a part of plant manual with due priority on continues
monitoring and reporting system.

Emergency equipment must be set on the risk of the hazards on the site. The following are some
mandatory emergency equipment:
 Alarms;
 Signage;
 Lighting/Emergency lighting;
 Exits / Emergency exit;
 Fire extinguishers;
 Confined spaces;
 Welfare facilities;
 Flooding and storm water;
 Pipe burst within pump station;
 HV/MV/LV Power hazards;
 Chemical hazards.

b) Alarm systems
Emergency alarms must meet the requirements governing the hazards and the risk. As a minimum, all
sites including pumping station must have a fire alarm system capable of evacuating the site safely in
a minimum timeframe, being it electrical or mechanical.

Other alarms to consider in pump room and treatment works would be:
 Pump alarm normally blue flashing;
 Telephone alarm normally white flashing;
 Chlorine alarm normally orange flashing;
 Fire alarm normally red flashing.
 Use of ISO Colour code for different functional piping above ground.

All alarms are normally backed up with audible high pitched sound. Staff must be trained and aware of
what to do in the event of any alarm.

c) Lighting including emergency lighting


Interior and exterior lighting facilities must be provided where necessary and automatically operate
emergency lighting system must be installed as part of the normal lighting and must last for a minimum
of 30 minutes on automatic action during an emergency. It must also illuminate the safe route to a final
exit from any part of the building structure.

Where exterior lighting is required, it shall be equipped with an automatic presence detector lasting not
less than 5 minutes. Table 4.3 guides the lighting requirement for some critical areas.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 82 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Table 4.3. Guide for lighting.

Recommended Illumination Levels Area Recommended Illumination


Electrical Rooms 30
Indoor Process Areas 30
Mechanical Equipment Rooms 30
Outdoor Process Areas 5
Restrooms 20

d) Emergency exit door


Emergency exit door must be provided so that staff can evacuate the building during an emergency by
the fastest safe route and all final exits must have push/paddle bar release. Emergency exit door shall
be designed to open from red zone (risk place) to green zone (safe place).
Where required, dependent on volume of staff these may need to be double doors.

e) Health and safety signage


All emergency exits, walkways, staircases, hall ways must have emergency signage dictating the
direction of travel to the emergency exits including pictograms on what actions to carry out on route or
at the exit i.e. push bar release.

Other signage required on the site should follow best international practice and the following categories
must be observed:
 Mandatory;
 Prohibition;
 Emergency and warning;
 Danger;
 Information.
All signage will be worked out on the hazard identified risk assessment and may change with further
building design or alteration.

f) Firefighting equipment
Firefighting equipment can only be decided on the recommendations from a fire risk assessment in line
with the completed design from the designer and further improved during the course of construction.
Approval of PACDA shall be obtained. This may include but not be limited to fire extinguishers,
suppression systems, fire blankets etc.

g) Confined spaces
Confined spaces are normally found where chemicals are stored or dosed (i.e. chlorine) or in an area
with limited access and egress, or where there is a risk from flooding, free flowing solids or the design
of the building or structure dictates.
Mandatory equipment requirements should be used in these areas and the following list should be
included but is not exhaustive. This would be decided on a thorough and comprehensive confined space
risk assessment.

 Gas monitors;
 Tripod and Winch;
 Harness;
 Breathing apparatus;
 PPE.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 83 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
h) Welfare facilities
Welfare facilities must be included in all pumping stations for the benefit of staff and operational
requirements. They should include the following as a minimum but this may change on the use of the
site or risks that develop:
 Toilets and washing facilities;
 Changing areas;
 Pantry/Canteen facilities (depending on size of site);
 First aid facilities including a minimum of a 10-man first aid kit with 2 eye wash bottles;
 On all sites where chemicals or substances are to be used, a safety shower(s) must be fitted
(see requirements in Other Facilities).

i) Safety shower and eyewash


Safety showers must be available in all areas where there is a high concentration of chemicals or
substances with the potential to harm. This could be one or more on larger sites. The shower must be
constructed of stainless steel and rise from the floor at least 2.5 meters with a shower arm at right angle
to the main body “length of 0.5 meters” and a shower head 20 cm wide. It must have a foot pedal and
pull handle activation that will release abundant amounts of water from a free flowing main or tank that
is at normal body temperature between 16 and 26° C. The water must run for a minimum of 30 minutes.
Around the base of the shower must be an interceptor that can take the residue chemical or substance
away to safe storage (Remember that this storage must be emptied after emergency use). The shower
must be green with white striping and must be signed above and from any substance source; it must
be a maximum of 10 meters from any substance.

Attached to the safety shower fitted to the main stem at about 1.2 meters should be an eyewash, which
is activated on opening allowing the injured person to places eyes in the flow of water, which must be,
controlled a reasonable speed so as not to cause further damage. This should also empty to the
interceptor.

4.2.20 Other facilities


 Access Doors: Doors giving access to the facilities and equipment must be equipped with anti-
intrusion system providing access only through use of a code or badge. The doors must open
in an outward direction.
 Ladders: A chain must be installed across access ladders as a means of preventing further entry
and as a visible sign unless authorized not to go beyond. In this instance, the chain must be
replaced after the entry and exit.
 Sump covers should be installed and be of the gridded type each grid not exceeding 30 x 30
mm.
 Trench covers: Steel or GRP trench covers for easy access for maintenance shall be
considered. Whereas, chequered plates to be used in elsewhere.
 Sump: The pump house drainage sump shall be equipped with float level controllers ''Pear
shape type'' and a drainage pump that initiates automatically when the sump is full.
 For the security of the pumping station an independent flood alarm system shall also be
installed. This system shall consist of a level controller ''Pear shape type'' positioned 20 cm
above the floor which will inform the Control room.
 Communication: A telephone booth shall be provided inside the building adjacent to the pump
room with a vision panel in to the pump room. A flashing white light shall be installed to indicate

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 84 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
the phone is ringing in the pump room. The operator must go into the telephone booth to operate
the phone.

4.3 Hydraulic Calculations for Pump

4.3.1 Pump design parameters


The required capacity of pumping station and its location is determined from hydraulic network analysis.
The pump house building shall be as per the building standards guideline of Diam. For the selection of
pump size, the flow rate or capacity, Q (m3/h) and pump head H (mwc) are needed at the required duty
point.

The capacity of a pump is the amount of water pumped per unit time. Capacity is also called discharge
or flow rate (Q). In metric units, it is expressed as liters per minute (l/min) or cubic meters per second
(m3/sec).

Head is the amount of energy added to the water between the suction and discharge sides of the pump.
Pump head is measured as pressure difference between the discharge and suction sides of the pump
and the velocity head difference. Expressed in meters (m) of the water. Pressure and head are two
different ways of expressing the same value. Usually, when the term "pressure" is used, it refers to units
in kilo Pascals (kPa), whereas "head" refers to meter’s (m).

The selection of the appropriate pump curve depends on the specific duty point requirements and
system head curve is a major task for design engineer.

4.3.2 Operating point


Pump characteristics are determined from the pump curve.

The point of intersection between system curve and the pump curve is to be considered as the operating
point during design.

There are several ways to change this operating point.

Operating point can be changed by changing the pump curve, which can be achieved by:
 Parallel operation of more pumps (more discharge);
 Serial operation of more pumps (higher head).

Another way is to change the system characteristics by:


 Altering pump speed;
 Changing pipe diameters;
 Altering impeller diameter;
 Changing pump model.

Whereas “Throttling valves” to meet pump duty point is not acceptable. It is a major concern and
correct design is the responsibility of experience design engineer.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 85 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
4.3.3 NPSH and cavitation
The required net positive suction head (NPSHr) is the amount of pressure required to prevent the
formation of vapour-filled cavities of water within the eye of impeller. The formation and subsequent
collapse of these vapour-filled cavities is called cavitation and is destructive to the impeller. The NPSHr
to prevent cavitation is a function of pump design and is usually determined experimentally for each
pump. The head within the eye of the impeller, the net positive suction head available (NPSHa), should
exceed the NPSHr to avoid cavitation.

It is important to accurately differentiate the required NPSH indicated on the characteristic curve of the
pump and the available NPSH that is determined from the characteristic of operations of pump suction
against reservoir water levels.

A CFD analysis along with the hydraulic calculations showing safe operation against cavitation of
selected pump curve at peak hour – lowest reservoir level shall be a part of the design report.
The CFD analysis for different options of pipefittings at the above scenario shall be produced to justify
the best selection of fittings.

To avoid the phenomena of cavitation, it is necessary to comply with the rule:


 Available NPSH > required NPSH;
 For safety, the available NPSH must always be greater than the required NPSH of at least 1 m
above required. In worst-case operation.

4.3.4 Hydraulic transient


The detail design report shall include a complete hydraulic transient study considering all possibilities
of operations of start-up, sudden shut down, valves shut down in the piping. The designer has the option
of using his pipe flow software such as Wanda, EPANET, KY pipe, Bentley hammer, etc.

The hydraulic model shall be submitted with:


1. Calculations;
2. Pressure profiles maximum / minimum;
3. Transient properties for flow, pressure with time and along the pipe length;
4. Regions for column separation, negative pressure;
5. Selection of NRV;
6. Surge suppression system.

It shall include a separate chapter with operation philosophy for:


 Different scenarios;
 Necessary protections for safe pump operations;
 Recommended start up and shut down;
 Run on design scenarios.

4.4 Pump Design


Centrifugal pumps are most commonly used in water supply systems in Diam, which is a hydraulic
machine converts mechanical energy into potential energy. Centrifugal pumps are known as
Rotodynamic pump or dynamic pressure pump. Detailed specifications are available in TET-SS-5057.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 86 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
4.4.1 Pump selection
Selection of the type and size of pump will be determined from the system duty requirement and
specific speed for the pump. It will determine the final arrangement of the pumps, electro mechanical
and other ancillary equipment within the pumping station.

A pump depends on the design requirements needs to provide a range of flows over a range of
system pressures in order to satisfy system demand criteria. The main criteria when selecting a
pump is operating efficiency.

The design consultant is to ensure that there is a commercially available pump, which satisfies the
required duty with high efficiency from at least three well-reputed suppliers.

Selection of a pump suited to the application, requiring an acceptable level of maintenance and efficient
in operation is critical to achieving minimum whole-of-life costs.

Each pump and drive unit are to be suitable for pumping water and for performing the duty throughout
the specified range. The operating (flow and head) requirements are to be determined by the design
consultant and should be approved by Diam.

Consideration is to be given to:

• NPSH (A), system flow and head for initial and ultimate requirements (where applicable);
• Pump efficiency within the normal duty range;
• Pump speed;
• Standby capacity, required;
• Best efficiency point to be as close as practical or within the normal operating range;
• Availability of spare parts, supported by adequate local service agent.

4.4.2 Field of use


The quality of potable water is an important factor for selection of pumps. The choice of the pump
components for its materials of Construction is based on the chemical and physical properties of the
water. The components of a pump are briefed in Section 03 of this guideline.
The selection or choice of the MOC for each of these components shall be:
 Corrosion and wear resistance against potable water;
 Resistance for decay and malfunctioning against physical properties of the potable water.

4.4.3 Shaft position


 Horizontal pump: The shaft of the pump is horizontal or parallel to the ground. Entire pump unit
would be installed on the ground level;
 Vertical pump: The shaft of the pump is vertical or perpendicular to the ground. Motor is located
above the pump head or at a higher level with an extended shaft.

Design of the shaft material shall be according to AWWA E103.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 87 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
4.4.4 Number of impeller(s)
There are two types of pumps:
 Single stage pump: is composed of one volute with a single impeller;
 Multi stages pump: is composed of more than one impeller, each increasing pressure above its
predecessor.
Impellers in multiple stages shall have same diameter and trim.
All Impellers shall be hydraulically and dynamically balance as per ISO 1940-1 latest version or as per
design engineer recommendation.

4.4.5 Type of impeller


The type of impeller depends on the type of water to pump, total head and discharge. Impeller type can
be open, semi open or closed.

Suction can be either single suction or double suction. A single suction impeller allows liquid to enter
the center of the blades from only one direction. A double suction impeller allows liquid to enter the
center of the impeller blades from both sides simultaneously.

Pumps can be classified according to the suction and delivery of the liquid with reference to the position
of the access of the impeller.

1. Radial Flow–Normally a centrifugal pump is of radial type in which liquid enters at access and
flows out radially. In radial flow pressure is developed wholly by centrifugal force;
2. Axial Flow–In axial flow liquid enters along the access and flows out along the access. In axial
flow the pressure is developed by the propelling or lifting action of the vanes of the impeller on
the liquid;
3. Mixed Flow–This is a combination of radial and axial flow in which the pressure is developed
partly by centrifugal force and partly by the lift of the vanes of the impeller on the liquid.

4.4.6 Type of casing


In case of a volute pump a spiral casing is provided around the impeller. The water, which leaves the
vanes, is directed to flow in the volute chamber circumferentially. The area of volute chamber gradually
increases in the direction flow. Thereby, velocity reduces and pressure increases. As the water reaches
delivery pipe, a considerable part of kinetic energy is converted into pressure energy. However, eddies
are not completely avoided, therefore some loss of energy takes place due to continually increasing
quantity of water through volute chamber.

In case of a diffuser pump, a guide wheel containing a series of guide vanes or diffuser is the additional
component. The diffuser blades which provides gradually enlarging passages surround the impeller
periphery. They serve to augment the process of pressure built up that is normally achieved in volute
casing.

4.4.7 Number of suction ports


Normally all centrifugal pumps will have single suction entry for water inlet. In case of double suction,
two impellers are set back to back. The two suction eyes together reduce the intake. The two suction
eyes together reduce the intake velocity reduce the risk of cavitation. Mixed flow type double suction
axial flow pumps besides are capable of developing higher heads.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 88 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
4.4.8 Specific speed
Specific speed is a non-dimensional number characterizing the type of impeller in a unique and coherent
manner and is determined independent of pump size, which indicates whether the suction condition of
the pump is sufficient to prevent cavitation. This factor can be useful when comparing different pump
designs.

The designer shall consider the required pump impeller considering the best efficiency, impeller type,
etc. for the particular pump section.

4.5 Components of Pump

4.5.1 Motor
Pumps are to be designed to operate on AC induction motors and drives.
The power delivered to the motor shaft is known as brake horsepower (BHP).

There are three different types of motor drives as follows:


 Fixed speed: one speed, used in most cases;
 Multi-speed: generally, two choices of speed, rarely used in pumping;
 Variable speed: constantly adapting to the pumping need (direct delivery system with variable
flow and constant pressure).

The speed of rotation depends on the number of pairs of poles where the common speed for a
frequency of 50 Hz are:
 3000 rpm with 2 poles
 1500 rpm with 4 poles
 1000 rpm with 6 poles

The following points shall be considered during the selection of the motor:
 Never oversize a pump but select with the required duty point considering limited margin;
 Selected motor shall be capable of running the pump in any point on the pump curve;
 Choose a motor with sufficient power reserve but not too oversized;
 Respect NEMA standard for allowable number of starts and minimum time between starts as
per applied voltage and frequency in accordance with MG1, 12.44;
 Prefer a motor running 1500 rpm rather than 3000 rpm to maximize longevity and reliability;
 For all motors winding class should be class F with a service factor of 1.1 as a minimum;
 The ambient temperature inside pump house is generally 55° C;
 The selection of the motor is done according to the capacity of the pump. Motor selection shall
be based on the impeller size, maximum capacity, specific gravity of the fluid, and service
application. The selected motor shall be capable of operating the pump in any range on selected
pump curve. Motor capacity shall have run off power demand of the pump, sufficient margin min
10% over the maximum operating point. Motor shall be designed with proper overloading
service factor minimum of 1.15%.

4.5.2 Impeller
Impeller is the rotating component of the pump. It is made up of a series of curved vanes. The impeller
is mounted on the shaft connecting an electric motor. Impeller material can be phosphor bronze LG 1,
LG 2, cast iron, stainless steel or as detailed by the design engineer.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 89 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
4.5.3 Casing
Casing is an airtight chamber surrounding the impeller. The shape of the casing is designed in such a
way that the kinetic energy of the impeller is gradually changed to potential energy. This is achieved by
gradually increasing the area of cross section in the direction of flow. The casing shall be pressure
tested for the reference shut off head of the pump.

4.5.4 Shaft
The design Engineer may specify pump shaft shall be Grade 431 stainless steel in accordance with AS
1444 with a ground finish over its entire length and shall have sufficient dimensions to transmit the
maximum power of the motor. Alternatively, shall be confirm to:
 Pump Shaft Stainless Steel to BS EN 10088 Designation 1.4021 /1.4401 / 1.4057
 Shaft Sleeves Stainless Steel to BS EN 10088 Designation 1.4021 / 1.4401
The design engineer shall specify high tensile steel shafts with stringent standards and finishes,
protection from stress-induced corrosion, failures, etc.

4.5.5 Seals
Seals are leakage control devices. Seals are meant to control escape of liquid from the volute along the
shaft. The seals are designed to ensure that the point where shaft passes from the inside to the outside
of the pump does not leak.

They are of two types:


 Gland packing;
 Mechanical seals.

Packings are made of woven fabrics impregnated with various lubricating substances in order to lower
friction. It is packed within a gland housing that needs manual adjustment to prevent leakage but still
ensure lubrication by the liquid to be pumped.

Mechanical seals are another key component of pumps. They consist of two faces, one stationary on
the outer side and the other rotating inner side and are located on the shaft between the impeller and
the rear casing.

4.5.6 Coupling
It is a device used to connect pump and motor shafts together for the purpose of transmitting torque.
The coupling is a unit, which connects the motor shaft and the pump shaft enabling the transfer of torque
energy from water to pump.

The coupling must full fill several functions such as:


 Absorbing and accommodating torque irregularities (shocks);
 Allow some misalignment between the shaft of the motor and the pump;
 Separate the critical systems (avoid the problem of resonance).

The choice of coupling requires knowledge of the following parameters:


 Nominal transmission torque;
 Stiffness, permissible misalignment, offsets;
 Dimensions;
 Atmosphere, temperature;
 Safety coefficient, nominal torque of the coupling.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 90 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
4.5.7 Bearings
Bearings are intended to provide smooth friction free rotation of the shaft of motor and pump.
A wide variety of bearings is available. All bearings shall be designed for not less than 50,000 hours of
operation.

Bearing must be able to:


 Support the loads between the rotor and the pump casing;
 Ensure a minimum friction with good lubrication;
 Ensure proper alignment.

Bearings consist of:


 Two rings: outer one linked to a fix element (body of the pump) and inner element related to a
rotating part (shaft);
 A cage: to position and maintain the rotating balls in the bearing rings;
 Rolling body: balls or rollers ensure proper contacts between the rotating and the stationary
rings.

The lubricant must full fill the following functions:


 Reduction of friction torque;
 Reduction of the wear;
 Transfer of heat (oil lubrication);
 Reduction of operating noise;
 Protection of the bearing against corrosion;
 Quench of the bearing (grease lubrication) to prevent penetration of solid or liquid bodies;
 Compatibility with the seals;
 Tolerance or repellence to moisture.

There are two types of lubrication:


1. Oil lubrication: when speed and temperature are high;
2. Grease lubrication: When speed is restricted, (the maximum speed permitted for grease-
lubricated bearings is 20% less than the maximum speed permitted in oil lubrication). When
protection against corrosion is important and to provide life-lasting lubrication.

4.5.8 Suction pipe


It is the pipe connecting the pump to the reservoir outlet from where the water is flooded with positive
suction. However, in unavoidable circumstances the design engineer can design detailed negative
suction pumps with due care for NPSH available at the suction eye of pumps when running at peak
hours with maximum demand and reservoir level is at its lowest.

4.5.9 Foot valve with strainer


The foot valve is a non-return valve, which permits the flow of the liquid from the sump towards the
pump. In other words, the foot valve opens only in the upward direction. The strainer is a mesh
surrounding the valve; it prevents the entry of debris and silt into the pump. The strainer shall be of not
more than 20 mm maximum allowable passable passage.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 91 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
4.5.10 Delivery pipe and delivery valve
It is pipe connected to the pump to the outlet delivery connection and delivery valve is fitted on the
discharge line to regulate the flow of liquid from the pump. The delivery valve shall be motorized butterfly
(BF) valve and shall be detailed for its operations in the control philosophy by the design engineer.

4.6 Pump Performance Testing


A pump test is performed to measure various aspects of the pump's operation. The end result of a pump
test is an estimate of the overall efficiency of pump and to authenticate the manufacturer design
guarantee are attaining at rated parameters.

The pumps shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the last edition of one of
the following appropriate standards:
 ISO
 BS EN
 DIN
 API
 Hydraulic Institute Standards (HIS)

The pumps and associated equipment shall be designed and suitable for the climatic conditions in the
Sultanate of Oman.

The pumps shall be of a type as indicated in the particular requirements of the specifications.

The pumps shall be designed for continuous duty at rated parameters and should be capable of
pumping the flow ranges specified in the specifications.

The pumps and associated equipment shall include all necessary provisions to prevent contamination
of the drinking water being pumped.

The Contractor/Manufacturer shall produce material test certificates for all components making up the
pump in accordance with ISO 10474-3.1B certificate.

Diam reserve the right for shop inspection / stage inspection by their authorized representatives. The
Manufacturer / Contractor shall provide full assistance and co-operation for such inspections. Transport
conditions to safeguard all parts of the pump, motor including the bearings and seals should be clearly
defined.

The Contractor / Manufacturer shall make suitable provisions for detailed shop testing of the pump and
inform Diam sufficiently in advance to enable their representatives to witness the tests.

The pumps shall be tested in accordance with the ISO 9906 or relevant equivalent standard to be
approved by Diam or their representative, at the Manufacturer premises to witness the pump
performance as per the designed guarantee points as detailed in the specifications /contract.

4.6.1 Factory acceptance test (FAT)


a) Pump
The factory test for each variable speed pump shall include, but shall not be limited to the below:

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 92 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 Factory performance test should include at least five data points evenly spaced from minimum
to maximum flow to define the shape of the pump curve. Pump manufacturer should guarantee
pump performance at the flow, head, brake horsepower, and efficiency specified. Pump curves
developed during the factory test should be certified to guarantee performance. Testing of large
pumps to use the job motor for the testing. All submersible pumps should be tested with the job
motors. NPSH as per the approved requirements;
 Test on power consumption and efficiency;
 Bearing temperature measurement;
 Noise measurement;
 Vibration measurement.

b) Motors
All motors shall be given a standard commercial test as defined by IEEE and the all tests shall confirm
the followings:
 Temperature
 Efficiency
 Torque
 No load, full voltage vibration level
 Noise test
 Power consumption
 Winding resistance
 High voltage
 Locked rotor test
 Direction of rotation
 Insulation resistance

All listed tests shall be detailed and procedures shall be included for every test along with the acceptable
tolerances according to international standards.

All instruments used during shop tests at Manufacturer’s premises shall be duly calibrated by
recognized laboratories and the calibration certificates shall be inspected and certified by Diam’s
representatives prior to starting the shop tests. The equipment for testing pump performance
corresponds to the most common pump test standards ISO, HIS and DIN.

The calibration certificates should not be more than six months old. (required to be calibrated
periodically).

4.6.2 Site acceptance test (SAT)


After installation and before commissioning, the Contractor shall carry out a site test and to be witnessed
by Diam, their representative (Consultant) and manufacturer’s representative.

The consultant shall detail required SAT for pre- commissioning and commissioning. It shall cover
whatever required tests to perform for the best commissioning. It should be incorporated by the design
engineer in his detail design submissions. Some of the required tests are given below:

 Proper Installation and alignment, levelling of pump / motor and coupling;


 Head / flow characteristics of the pump with speed;
 Pump designed duty points with speeds;

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 93 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 Vibration measurements;
 Bearing & motor winding temperature measurements;
 Test on relay settings, system earth and power redundancy;
 Test on fire detection system;
 Test on SCADA, PLC and RTUs;
 Noise measurements;
 Hipot, megger and earth testing for power cables, motor etc.;

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 94 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
CHAPTER 5 POTABLE WATER RESERVOIRS

Chapter 5 describes the potable water reservoirs requirements to fulfill intended quality and

quantity for a water storage system. The guideline shows the general design requirements for

potable water storage reservoir, demand calculations, location and type of structure and intended

performance.

This chapter is a standalone chapter and shall be read in line with the requirements of other chapters within this

document “Integrated Water Supply System” as well as with the other publications by Diam e.g. manuals, standard

specifications and drawings.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 95 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
5.1 Reservoirs Aim and Objectives
The aim of reservoirs is to provide water balance for distribution network or/and pumping stations
during peak usage as well as to provide a reasonable undisturbed level of service.

This aim will be achieved through the following objectives:


- Locate reservoirs in prime locations inasmuch as reach distribution networks by gravity;
- Provide enough capacities to maintain the minimum volume, between any two programable
logic levels (HiHi to Hi), required to operate a pump within its minimum operational time;
- Maintain adequate level of pressure within a distribution network inasmuch as reduce the
need for break pressure tanks and pressure controlling valves;
- Locate reservoirs downstream the main interconnected transmission system to secure
storage capacities within network coverage area;
- Design holding capacities inasmuch as reduce outage of water during major shutdown for
about 48 hours.

5.2 Reservoirs Classifications

5.2.1 Location
Under Ground Reservoirs (UGR)
The structure considered buried if more than half of the reservoir structure or more than half of
the water column inside the reservoir is under the finished ground level.
Ground Balancing Reservoirs (GBR)
Balancing reservoirs receives/supply to pumps stations and shall be sized according to Diam
design guide lines of not less 4 times peak hourly demand for safe pumps operation.
Ground Service Reservoirs (GSR)
The structure considered ground mounted if less than half of the reservoir structure or less than
half of the water column inside the reservoir is above the finished ground level
Elevated Service Reservoirs (ESR)
The structure considered elevated if all of the reservoir structure is above the finished ground
level and they serve in different purposes such as:
 Tanker filling stations
 Demand supply
 Pressure break tanks
Surge Feed Reservoirs (SFR)
This type of reservoirs for equalizing the negative pressure at peak transmission main lines
points shall be sized according to the negative pressure volume, by detailed surge analysis using
trusted hammer software.

5.2.2 Type
Reinforce Concrete Reservoirs (RCR)
Conventional Reinforced concrete structure according to related international standards listed in
the standard lists mentioned in this guideline.
Pre-Stressed Concrete Reservoirs (PCR)

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 96 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Circular pre-stressed reservoir according to American Water Works Associations (AWWA)
standard (AWWA D110-13 Type 1). No Other Pre-stressed types are allowed to be used in this
guideline.
Glass Reinforced Plastic (GRP)
Glass Reinforced Plastic tanks are allowed and shall be designed according to Diam standard
specification TET–SS-5033 and this design guidelines; as well obtain approval in writing.
Steel Tanks
Steel welded tanks shall be designed according to AWWA D100-96 or equivalent standard.
Steel Bolted Tanks
Steel bolted tanks shall be designed according to recent version of AWWA D103 and shall meet
Diam requirements.

5.3 General Design Guidelines

5.3.1 Design alternatives


The designer has to consider performing study for the most cost and time effective choice for
the types of the reservoirs based on serviceability, quality, materials, constructability and volumes.
The study should base on the present value analysis for the available alternatives. The factors to
consider in the study:
• volumes
• cost of the structures
• cost for the maintenance
• cost for the replaceable items
• cost for the power
• cost for the operation

5.3.2 Design and demand considerations


The capacity allocation for each type of reservoirs shall be governed by the projects demand
calculations based on latest version of Diam master plan demands forecasting and trending
according to National Centre for Statistics and Information (NCSI). In addition, the designer may
refer to CHAPTER 1 - Basic Design Criteria. In general, the designer is to consider two peak day
demand, pumps off, storage capacity. Whilst designing water storage reservoir, future developments
should be taken into consideration by optimizing the footprint for immediate phase and allowing
space for future expansion. In addition to the two peak day demand and for service reservoirs only,
water required for firefighting shall be included as per the Public Authority for Civil Defense and
Ambulance (PACDA) guideline. This fire storage volume depends on the maximum flow rate and
duration requirements needed in the supplying distribution system in accordance with PACDA
guidelines.

The Gross Volume (GV) of the reservoir consists the volume between the overflow level and
finished floor level (FFL) excluding the free board which is the distance between the overflow and
the bottom soffit of the roof structural element (slab/beam).

Dead storage (DS) is the volume of stored water not available for distribution permanently. It is
the total storage below pipe top level of the lowest discharge outlet from the reservoir. The dead
storage usually contains accumulated deposits such as mud, silt and residues which should not enter

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 97 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
into the potable water distribution system directly. The dead storage volume should not be more than
5% of the reservoir’s effective volume.

The Effective Storage (ES) or the service storage for peak day is the volume of storage requires
to meet two peak day demand in water distribution system excluding the water required for
firefighting. Many factors influence this volume including peak diurnal variations in water system
demand, source production capacity, and the mode of source water operation. The design engineer
shall consider source water hydraulic capabilities to properly evaluate ES requirements and design
of each storage system. If the project is to be phased and more storage reservoirs are required for
ultimate design period, the first phase storage reservoir shall include the capacity of 48 hours plus
storage requirement for firefighting for the phase-1.

The effective volume is calculated as the difference in height between the High-High (HH) and
Low-Low (LL) levels multiplied by the cross-sectional area. The difference between HH and LL levels
shall confirm the minimum requirement for pumps operation, e.g. suction volume, minimum on/off
period and accommodate the maximum hour of a peak week. The LL level is calculated based on
the volume of the reservoir, if the capacity is ≥ 5000 m3, LL shall be 300 mm above finished floor
level (FFL) and if the capacity is < 5000 m3, LL shall be 600 mm above FFL. HH level shall be located
under the overflow by taking the maximum of 100 mm or 2% of the effective volume. The difference
in level between HH & H shall be designed to be equal to the difference between HH & overflow.
The free board shall be 300 mm or the other operational requirements. The difference in level
between LL & L shall be designed to be the maximum of 100 mm or 2% of the effective volume or
the storage for firefighting.

There shall be a HAZOP study for the protection of the assets, loss of water, wastewater & outlet
drainage provisions. Based on the HAZOP study, the designer can recommend final HH, H, and L &
LL with free board for the water reservoirs.

5.3.3 Environmental requirements


The designer has to consider the design should not cause any harm to the surrounding
environment by designing proper disposal procedures for any chemicals used for disinfections during
the service life and periodic maintenance.

5.3.4 Maintainability
The designer has to consider flexible maintainable design, specifying the periodic maintenance
schedules for each designed component at the reservoirs compound including the structural parts
and the electromechanical parts and instrumentations.

5.3.5 Site allocation


 The location of the reservoir shall comply with the requirements of this sub-section along
with the requirements of sub-sections 5.3.6 to 5.3.9 .
 The location of a reservoir may be influenced by hydraulic considerations so that the
network can operate satisfactorily under the design peak demand conditions. Preferably
center to the distribution area and proximity to the source.
 The location shall be selected so that water pressure to consumers meets Diam’s design
criteria.
 Safe access to the site in all weather conditions.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 98 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 The choice of reservoir site is usually determined by the land availability for reservoir,
inlet/outlet/scour, overflow pipework, flow meter and pump station structure etc.
 To ensure the availability of the selected area with Ministry of Housing (MOH) before
proposing the location to Diam.
 The location shall not be near or next to heritage places and graveyard. Provision of
sufficient buffer from existing houses, and future planned area development. In Oman,
mostly the service/storage reservoirs shall be kept on the mountain (Jabel) to supply water
to the demand areas. Special considerations, calculation should be given to minimize the
mountains cuts and excavations.
 Electrical power supply facilities should be available or able to be provided economically to
the site.
 The choice of ground reservoir at Jabel or elevated tank at ground shall be decided based
on capital (CAPEX) and operational (OPEX) cost analysis.
 Pumps house location should be considered when considering the reservoirs location
(Pumps Suction).
 To ensure that the proposed reservoir location and layout are acceptable, the proposed site
shall be approved in advance by Diam.
 Consideration should also be given to the potential likelihood of future development to
enable a future storage of similar or required size within the site footprint. Minimum site
backs shall be considered. Spacing between structures shall be the maximum of footing
interaction or height of super-structure.
 Consider adequate storm water management and drainage for the site facilities so that
flooding of facility is avoided.
 Access road shall be designed as per the Ministry of Transport (MOT) and ROP standards.
The ascending gradient should not be more than 1V:10H.

5.3.6 Topographic survey


The designer has to consider having preliminary topographical survey for the selected reservoirs
sites, showing clearly the contour lines elevations and the contour intervals. Topo - survey drawings
with topo-survey report shall be submitted along with the preliminary design report for the reservoirs.
The drawing should include the volumes for cut/fill and calculations.

5.3.7 Soil investigation


5.3.7.1 Geotechnical investigation
The designer has to consider having comprehensive soil investigation works for the new projects
sites as per the specified standards to verify the homogeneous, settlements and the strength of the
soil layers underneath the reservoirs foundations before proceeding with the detail design. The soil
investigation works shall be conducted by an approved professional geotechnical offices/laboratory,
registered in Oman. The design must count on the collected sites soil parameters. No design for the
reservoirs and other site facilities foundations allowed based on assumed soil parameters.

5.3.7.2 Geophysical Investigation


The design consultant has to consider having additional geophysical soil investigations test to
verify the homogeneous, settlements and the strength of the soil layers underneath the reservoirs

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 99 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
foundations before proceeding with the detail design. Either type of the following GPS tests
recommended, depending on the depth of the soil layer:

 Multi-channel speed wave analysis (active or passive)


 Seismic refraction test (compressive and shear wave velocity profile)

5.3.8 Seismic considerations


All type of the reservoirs recommended in this guideline shall consider having earthquake
resisting structures according to Seismic Design Code of Oman – Version 1. Noting that earthquake
resistance structural design is not required for boundary wall and guard room.

5.3.9 Permits and approvals


As part of the designing/planning phase, necessary approvals should be obtained for the access
road from the following respective regional authorities (Table 5.1) or any other relevant authorities,
which may be deemed required for the project, with a detailed drawing showing the followings:

• Project location
• Access road layouts including cutting/filling
• Cross sections at different chainage (shows bench cutting/filling)
• Longitudinal profile shows the percentage of ascending and descending slope
• Road markings and signs etc.
• Slope stability study for sites with cut and fill, to be prepared by the project designer.

Table 5.1. List of authorities for access road approval.

Authority Requirements Remarks

In the road/alignment layout


Ministry of Housing Ensure availability of land for the
extent of cut and fill boundary to
access road
be shown

Ensure on ascending gradient,


Ministry of turning radius, junction details GI guard rail shall be provided
and signage, where the difference in ground
Transport
ascending/descending bay level exceeds 1.0 m
requirements

Maintain the clear vertical


Ensure access road not affect
Electrical power distance of minimum 7 m
any existing underground or
supply provider between the permanent grade
above ground power utilities
level and electrical OHL

Ensure cut/fill not affect the


Regional drainage pattern of nearby area
Municipality and not affect nearby falaj
system

Telecommunication Shall not affect the underground (All telecommunication


providers services providers)

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 100 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Authority Requirements Remarks

Ministry of heritage Ensure access road boundary


and culture not affect any heritage site

Ensure junction details and


ROP
signage as per standards

5.3.10 Reservoirs foundation requirements


All structures shall be supported by strong foundations where the maximum differential of
uniform tilting shall not exceed 1/500. Reservoir on-grade-slab/foundation shall be designed based
on the report of soil investigation (geotechnical and geophysical) to withstand on the minimum
bearing capacity. Preferred to be constructed on hard strata of mountains but in case of lean soil,
if alternative location is not available, pile foundation shall be considered. Cast-in-situ pile
foundation shall be designed according to Eurocode 7 - Part 7 (EN 1997-7).

5.3.11 Reservoirs structural requirements


Design of structures shall be performance-based design and checked for strength requirements.
Alkali silica reaction (ASR), water absorption and equivalent sodium oxide shall be considered
according to the international design codes. In order of controlling crack widths, reinforced concrete
structures shall be made of hybrid conventional steel reinforcement and non-metallic fiber. A
maximum crack width of 0.2 mm shall be considered (including presence of fiber) during the design
according to Eurocode 2 (BS EN 1992-1) or fib Model Code 2010. Concrete shrinkage shall be
limited to 0.05%. Providing that curing shall be carried out by the contractor immediately after de-
shuttering.

The designer shall consider designing all structural elements using a suitable 3D structural
analysis software (preferably finite element analysis) providing that the software is capable of
integrating all elements together. Provision of expansion/contraction and construction joints shall be
designed to enhance the durability of the structure. Congestion of reinforcement, at joints, shall be
cleared during the design stage.

Expansion/ construction joints are weak joints within the structure and thus; reinforcement
detailing within and adjacent to these locations is a must. Therefore, location of placement of
waterstop bar or swelling waterstop bar shall be considered, i.e. congestion due to reinforcement,
waterstop technology and aggregates shall be studied. Preferably, at these locations, details up to
90% (min. 60%) to be carried out using aid of 3D modelling software.

The designer shall consider minimum grade of 35 MPa for concrete with a maximum aggregate
size of 20 mm and concrete cover of 50 mm. Supplementary cementitious materials can be
considered to enhance the long-term performance of concrete and shall meet the requirements of
AWWA or WRAS, etc. for use in potable water retaining structures. Reinforcement shall be made of
a ductile/high tensile strength steel with a minimum grade of 500 MPa according to BS 4449. No
epoxy coated reinforcement shall be used.

The designer shall consider roof top finishing to consist thermal insulation and screed with
average thickness of 100 mm. Solar panels shall considered to be fixed on top of the finished roof.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 101 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
5.3.12 Reservoirs comparting and partitioning
The ground level reservoir ought to be designed with partition to enable for the scheduled
maintenance/cleaning of service reservoirs without causing any disruption of receiving and supplying
of water. In general, division wall(s) shall divide(s) the total volume into equal compartments. For
mega storage capacity reservoirs, number of partitions and position of partition shall be decided
based on qualitative and quantitative analysis. In case of expansion/contraction joints, water stop
bars shall be located in the middle of the section in both retaining walls and on-grade-slabs. Partition
shall not be required if the effective capacity of ground level reservoir is less than 200 cubic meters.

5.3.13 Reservoirs testing


The reinforced concrete reservoirs have to be tested in accordance to BS EN 1992-3:2006.

Prestressed reinforced concrete reservoirs have to be tested in accordance to AWWA D110-04.

Steel Tanks has to be tested in accordance to AWWA D100-96.

5.3.14 Reservoirs aesthetic requirements


All reservoir shall be designed for no additional loads due to external finishing unless otherwise
stated for special requirement, like finishing with stone cladding or plastering. External walls shall be
painted according to Diam approval, preferred thermal insulation coating.

As the structures are designed to be watertight, crack width is less than 0.2 mm, and the
expansion joints are filled/treated with sealants that are designed not to pass water under extreme
conditions, no additional further surface treatments are required.

In case of structural failure and/or water leakage, root cause analysis shall be conducted and
accordingly, a proper and durable solution must be implemented.

In case the proposed solution to enhance the reservoirs structure durability and increase the
lifetime of the facility is inner lining system, lining materials must be WRAS/NSF approved for
materials in contact with potable water at 50 °C ambient temperature with chlorine contents, tested
according to BS 6920.

The following post failure, during or after maintenance period, lining systems materials can be used:

a. Cementous lining material


b. Epoxy lining material
c. Polyethylene (PE) lining system
d. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) lining system

Lining material shall feature:

 Outstanding physical properties


 Excellent chemical, abrasion and impact resistance
 Good low temperature flexibility
 Low gas permeability
 Excellent UV and weather resistance
 Does not contain solvents
 Easy to apply
 Providing a seamless coating with no vulnerable joints
 Can accommodate difficult surface profiles and shapes

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 102 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 High bond strength to substrate
 Long and effective life
 On site quality assurance program
 Highest elongation offered
 Applied only by authorized and trained contractors

5.3.15 Leak preventive system


The designer has to take in consideration that zero leakage allowed in the design. The designer
of water retaining structure shall consider a water stopper or/and any other methodology, used in
good engineering practice, to be provided at the joints during construction. In case of high ground
water table, the designer has to consider other alternative methods and need to be approved by
Diam.

5.3.16 Overflow site surface water drainage considerations


The design consultant has to consider (based on site and vicinity topo survey) having design
for draining the accumulated rainwater on the reservoir’s roofs, the entire site, and the overflow
water. Reservoirs roofs and site must be adequately sloped and drained offsite. The designer has
to consider preventing any water pooling inside or offside the reservoir site. Designer should
consider having approved offsite-draining location from the local authorities. Flap valve to be
designed at the end discharge points. Special consideration to the offside draining pipeline and
drops off point, it should not effects, in any matter, nearby citizens and private or official properties.

5.3.17 Spilling response plans considerations


A spill response a plan should be developed for the utility in the event of a major reservoir spill
or catastrophic failure. The response plan should be tailored to the reservoir design and site
location. The plan should outline which design features are in place or need to be activated for
minimizing the impact on life and property in the vicinity of the reservoir structure. Drawing should
be developed to show the details of the plan.

5.3.18 Site accessibility considerations


Access road is to be provided from nearest public road to the Diam site (reservoir/pump
station), where the access from a public road is not available then a suitable access road shall be
created. The design of the access road shall be subjected to approval and in accordance with the
local ROP / MOT /Local Municipality requirements. The design of access is based on the size of
operating and maintenance vehicles (min. 3T truck capacity).

The following shall be considered whilst designing the access road:

 External access with a minimum pavement width of 5 meters.


 Provide access road around full extent of reservoir or extent up to which the maintenance is
required until access to inlet/outlet/overflow chambers with a minimum width of 4 meters.
 Minimum turning radius shall be arrived based on the vehicle swept path analysis and
simulations.
 Bench cutting and filling shall be provided.
 Loose/weathered rocks /stones may fall from the uphill, therefore it is recommended to
protect the cut sloped sides with rich cement mortar grouting (with mesh reinforcement) as
per the geotechnical investigation recommendations. In case of earth filling, the embankment
portions shall be protected with geotextile membrane or riprap.
 Desirable maximum grade – 12%

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 103 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 Preferred cross fall – 3%
 The access road shall be designed in one of the following materials:
o Flexible pavement with asphalt seal
o Concrete pavement

5.3.19 Site security considerations


The protection of access to water facilities is important. Metal fences must be provided to
prevent trespassing, theft and introduction of harmful products to the water from act of domestic
and non-domestic aggression.

The following elements should be installed on sites that or deemed high or medium risks:

• Secured perimeter with minimum of 2.5 meters height with barbed wire at the top,
• Security gates lighting and signing as required,
• Secured doors, secured reservoir hatches, secured chamber hatches with security locks,
• Secured ventilation grilles, secured access ladder(s),
• Secured electrical installation or other utilities,
• CCTV or other monitoring equipment deemed necessary for the site by risk analysis or
advised from security advisors, ROP or Diam.

The following elements should be installed on sites with low risks:

• Secured entry point (ladder, door or hatch)


• Lighting and signage as required
• Secured perimeter could be of chain link type as it would normally be to stop animals and
trespassers only.

The following briefings and diagrams are designed to be incorporated on sites that are
deemed medium or high risk:

Doors with direct access to water

Air lock style double doors (Figure 5.1) with internal and external sealed panels at locations with
direct access to treated water, need to meet the specifications listed below.

These doors are equipped with a second internal anti contamination door with seals, hinges and
fastenings including fully concealed door locks at 90° open position. They are made from a single
plate of stainless steel or GRP with folded and shaped edges of 4 mm minimum thickness for SS
and higher for GRP and include stiffeners as needed. The door is mounted on an outer frame that
is seal to and built in to the masonry.

Three anchor points and a concealed handle provide closing the sash exterior.

Locks shall be electronics and programmed to allow access to authorized persons only. The
passcode shall be common to all sites within a DMA.

Each door and the first gate outside are fitted with an open sensor and a vibration sensor with a
combination box (linked to alerting system at control room), equipped with cable gland for a cable of
8 to10 mm in diameter. The output cables are made by passages through the masonry and flowing
into the compartment between the 2 doors. The implementation of louvre ventilation facades of
watertight doors is not allowed. The opening direction (right /left) of doors will be interior to exterior.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 104 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Hatch with direct access to water

Hatches are to be of the type raised in single or multiple doors and equipped with a second inner
door with single or multiple covers forming an internal compartment which provides insulation
between the inside and the outside to protect the reservoir. Figure 5.2 shows typical details for
hatches with direct access to water. This internal anti-contamination compartment includes a
drainage system and mounts for the hatch.

The assembly of the wing(s) internal(s) includes ventilation to allow the free flow of air from the tank,
preventing the accumulation of high levels of chlorine and protects the roof of the tank from the
phenomenon of "sucking" during declining water levels. The outlet of the ventilation must be
protected by a mosquito grid made of stainless steel 316.

On the first cover of each hatch, an open sensor (linked to alerting system at control room) is to be
fitted. The output cables are made by passages through the wall bracket and terminating in the
compartment between the two traps.

The hatches are sealed, vented and equipped with fixing points and concealed hinges. Opening of
the doors is supported by stainless steel springs. The doors should automatically lock in the open
position at 90 degrees. The outer cover is domed to promote runoff and lifting is done by an external
handle located on one side.

Locking is done by turning the lock 90 degrees. Locks are hidden under a cover ensuring its external
protection. The number of keys is limited and they are common to all sites. Access cover must be
single man lift type.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 105 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Dimension of passage

Identification plate

Support electronic detector


for opening

Dimension of passage
Padlock device conceals

Support for shock &


vibration detector

Interior door

Exterior door Concealed


hings

Figure 5.1. Typical details for door with direct access to water.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 106 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Folding security
bars

Anti retractable falls


Exterior cover

Interior cover

Concealed
Padlock system
hings
conceals

Anti-insect netting

Dimension of passage
Opening for cable

Support for opening electric


detector

Support for shock & vibration


detector

Hole for fixation

Figure 5.2. Typical details for hatches with direct access to water.

5.3.20 Water quality considerations


5.3.20.1 Disinfection
On site liquid hypochlorite generation system shall be considered for designing disinfecting
system for the reservoirs compartments, before and after commissioning. The system shall be
designed for minimum 20 mg/liter for disinfecting the reservoir before commissioning (after
construction/maintenance). The disinfection system shall be designed for maximum continuous
residual chlorination of 0.5 mg/liter during service.

The following systems shall be considered for design:

 On site Liquid Sodium Hypochlorite production system.


 On site Liquid Calcium Hypochlorite production system.

Consideration should be given for designing cold chemicals storage for Sodium / Calcium
Hypochlorite (liquid or dry) for safe operation sustainability. Dosing points shall be provided at inlet
and outlet, noting that eyewash system should be considered with the design. Cost benefit analysis
shall be performed and submitted with the design report for the best, cost effective adopted system.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 107 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
5.3.20.2 Water quality taps
Water samples quality checking taps shall be provided for each compartment inlet and outlet
pipes. The sample collections taps shall be easily accessible and marked according to Diam quality
department requirements.

5.3.20.3 Water stagnation


The Reservoir must be designed to minimize stratification and have adequate circulation and
baffling to prevent “dead spots” within the water column and short circuiting across the reservoir.
The designer shall model the behaviour of the water in the reservoir using a Computational Fluid
Dynamic (CFD) model and system behaviour data, including, but not limited to, diurnal cycles and
chlorine levels provided by Diam Operations. Modelling shall be demonstrated to the department
providing how the water, how stratification and short circuiting will be minimized. Noting that inlet
location has to be mentioned clearly during modeling.

For reservoirs design, the designer has to consider having two compartments, for safe reliance
and flexible operation during maintenance. Based on the CFD analysis, the designer shall
recommend whether to use baffle walls/curtains or agitators or combination of both.

The baffles are made of high screen reinforced Hypalon with uPVC posts and stainless-steel
anchoring bolts, built-in during construction not drilled. The Hypalon, the uPVC and the stainless-
steel anchor bolts should be DWI or WRAS approved for safe drinking water. Figure 5.3 and Figure
5.4 show baffle walls arrangements for circular and rectangular reservoirs, respectively. Typical
fixing details are shown in Figure 5.5.

Figure 5.3. Baffle walls arrangements for circular reservoirs.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 108 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Figure 5.4. Baffle walls arrangements for rectangular reservoirs.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 109 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Figure 5.5. Typical fixing details.

5.3.21 Ventilations requirements


Reservoirs must have adequate sanitary protection to prevent the water supply from being
contaminated. Drinking water regulations require reservoirs to prevent entry by birds, animals,
insects, excessive dust and other potential sources of contamination.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 110 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Finished water storage facilities must have dedicated screened vents designed to allow air in
and out to balance internal pressures. Vent size must be adequate to relieve vacuum during peak-
flow conditions. Vents must be sealed and secured to the roof to keep out contaminated surface
water and to deter vandalism (typical for all vent designs). Overflows are not venting.

Vents should be constructed and maintained to avoid plugging or air restriction from dust build-
up. Use reasonable security measures to protect the reservoir and stored water from possible
damage and compromise by unauthorized persons.

Vents must have screens to keep insects and animals out of the reservoir. We recommend using
durable 24-mesh non-corrodible screen backed with 4-mesh screen. Further, vent openings must
face downward or have shielding to minimize the entrance of insects, surface splatter, rainwater and
excessive dust.

The designer should consider having one electrical ventilator in each compartment for providing
the necessary fresh air during the maintenance. The design should be according to international
standards.

A typical sample types for Gooseneck-Style vents is shown in Figure 5.6 and a Mushroom-Style
vents is shown in Figure 5.7. These vents, made of durable non-corrodible steel, have an internal
downward or vertical screen with hood shield; they are secured or sealed to the reservoir roof to
keep out contaminants.

Figure 5.6. Typical Gooseneck-Style vents.

Figure 5.7. Typical Mushroom-Style vents.


5.3.22 Reservoirs access ladders
5.3.22.1 External Ladders
For security and maintenance of the exterior of the reservoir, a ladder equipped with a safety
cage and hand rail must be installed. The ladder should be aluminum or galvanized steel or stainless
steel. The ladder shall have locking facility to restrict access to unauthorized personnel.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 111 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
5.3.22.2 Internal ladders
The internal ladder (inside the reservoir compartment) should be constructed of completely
GRP or stainless steel only. Four rungs of the ladder must protrude outside of the entry hatch. This
can be achieved by part of the ladder being hinged beside the access hatch acting as a secondary
barrier and ladder extension.

5.3.23 Inlet pipes chambers


The inlet pipe diameter should be sized for the ultimate designed flows (considering one
compartment is filling and other under maintenance). A 90° bend shall be provided on the discharge
to allow proper mixing. The inlet pipes shall be located outside the water compartment. Top wall inlet
shall be considered for inlet water pipe. Inlet pipe elbow rack (thrust block) shall be designed to be
positioned within the inlet chamber. The designer has to consider having inlet embedded puddle
flanges in the wall.

Minimum two inlets to be provided with additional one, redundant, for future connection. To be
considered in liaison with Diam.

Inlet is advisable to be located above the Hi-Hi water level but in case that bottom inlet has to
be done for certain reasons then, CFD modeling to be carried out based on the design.

5.3.24 Outlet pipes chambers


The outlet pipe diameter shall be sized for peak instantaneous (peak hour demand or fire flow
scenario whichever is more). Outlet pipe shall be one size larger than the discharge water main to
allow for a future increase in capacity. The designer can propose more than one outlet.

Minimum two outlet shall be provided for each compartment with additional (redundant) one for
future connection. To be considered in liaison with Diam. The redundant outlet shall be located next
to main outlet within the same outlet chamber. It shall be closed with the blank flange and to be
identified as “Redundant”. The designer has to consider having outlet embedded puddle flanges in
the wall.

The outlet pipe is to be fixed at a minimum 100 mm height above the outlet sump to minimize
the risk of any accumulated sediment within the reservoir being detained during reservoir operation.
This is typically achieved by positioning the outlet above the designed grade of the reservoir floor.

5.3.25 Overflow pipes


An overflow pipe has to be provided in each compartment with a suitable outlet arrangement.
The overflow pipe diameter shall be sized for peak instantaneous flows (all pumping running at
possible extreme flow regime). In general, the overflow pipe size is one size more than the inlet pipe.
Bellmouth fitting is preferable for overflow arrangement, situated a minimum 100 mm above top
water level with minimum of 300 mm freeboard between top of Bellmouth and underside of roof
elements and it should be free of obstruction from roof members.

The overflow line shall be properly routed to nearby Wadi and sufficient diligence should be
made in such that the overflow water should not cause any inconvenience by flooding nearby
dwelling or public access roads or public or private properties.

5.3.26 Strainers
The designer has to consider having strainer as per Diam standard (TET-SS-5012). The
screen shall be stainless-steel for use with potable water and with chlorine content.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 112 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
5.3.27 Gate Valves
The design has to be according to Diam standard reference (TET-SS-5006).

5.3.28 Butterfly Valves (Manual/Motorized)


The design has to be according to Diam standard reference (TET-SS-5007).

5.3.29 Meters
The design has to be according to Diam standard reference (TET-SS-5023).

5.3.30 Dismantling Joints


According to Diam standard reference (TET-SS-5001).

5.3.31 Reservoirs site power supply


The designer should consider two sources for electrical power supply to the reservoirs site
compound. One from renewable (e.g. solar panels) power supply utilizing the available roofs and
empty spaces at the reservoirs site and the second is from the domestic AC power supply. The
designer should consider automatic switching between the two sources depending on the available
electrical power intensity from either source. The design should include the tapping with the domestic
grid for surplus generated power. Renewable power design capacity shall be according to the
requirements of local distribution company. Structural loads for the power generation ancillaries
should be considered by the designer.

5.3.32 Reservoir site lighting


The designer should consider using most effective energy saving bulbs, according to AER
regulations, powered mainly by the solar energy while the domestic AC power shall be designed as
a backup. This should be applied to the site external and internal lightening, reservoir and chambers
internal lightening, SCADA and rotating equipment. Designer to select the right IP rating by following
the IEC 60529.

5.3.33 Instrumentations
Determination of water level categories are based on reservoir capacity, depth and daily
demand. Furthermore, the criteria of the time required to intervene in the event of a high-high alarm
must be a major consideration (travel time to site). Figure 5.8 shows a typical layout for different
water level categories and the required instrumentations, in each compartment, to communicate with
SCADA. Noting that the MOV and the analyzer are installed common to both compartments with the
following characteristics:
• The inlet MOV is preferred to be needle valve type with modulating type motorized actuator
with position control. Position feedback is a MUST.
• The MOV should have analog input of 4-20 mA for position control & analog output and 4-
20 mA for position indicator, apart from OPEN & CLOSE limit switches.
• The inlet flowmeter shall be electromagnetic type with remote mounted transmitter with 4-
20 mA (analog for flow rate) & pulse signal (DI for Totalizer).
• A pressure transmitter (PT) is also recommended at the inlet of reservoir with 4-20 mA.
• The level switch is recommended to be float type with two levels: HIHI & LOLO, this has to
operate to prevent overflow in case of failure of LT.
• The HIHI level of the float has to be physically fixed above normal LT control level for MOV
to "CLOSE". Hardwired to CLOSE the MOV is preferred.
• The LOLO level of the float has to be physically fixed below the normal LT control level for
MOV to "OPEN". Hardwired to OPEN the MOV is preferred.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 113 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
• The dosing has to be situated at either Outlet and/or Inlet as per the advice of the Quality
department, noting that the distance shall follow the requirements of contact time as in
CHAPTER 9 .

Figure 5.8. Schematic layout with different water levels.

The standard control requirements for reservoir are as follows:


 Multiple levels of set point provision are available from Human Machine Interface (HMI) /
SCADA for maintaining the level of water in the reservoirs by OPENING & CLOSING the
inlet MOV.
 Standard settings are:
o LOW level set between 60% to 70%, of the effective volume, for OPENING the inlet
MOV (settable, depending on Operations requirement).
o HIGH level set between 80% to 90%, of the effective volume, for CLOSING the Inlet
MOV (settable, depending on Operations requirement).

Alternatively, flow control is settable for different desired levels so that MOV is regulated for
controlling flow and maintain set level.

5.3.34 SCADA control


SCADA and Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) shall supervise, monitor and control the
reservoirs. All the data shall be collected from the different units and then transferred to SCADA-
RCC according to Diam standard specification TET-SS-5029. The following represents the basic
minimum, which should be monitored, controlled functions in SCADA system.

 Continuous monitoring of level (data);


 Low Low level (alarm);
 Low level (alarm);
 High level (alarm);
 High High level (alarm);
 Overflow (alarm);

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 114 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 Suction and discharge pressure low and high (alarms);
 Position and command of inlet and outlet valves;
 Water quality parameters (chlorination, turbidity, conductivity, pH and
temperature (data + alarms) to be confirmed by Water Quality department;
 Flow inlet/outlet (data + alarm);
 Historic data;
 Fire alarm;
 Chlorine leakage (alarm).

The following signals have to be taken to PLC for monitoring & controls:
 Level Transmitter (analog signal)
 Level switch (digital signal for HIHI & LOLO)
 Electromagnetic flow meter (analog & digital for flow & totalizer)
 Pressure transmitter (analog signal)
 MOV signals for modulating, flow and totalizer
 Analyzer signals (analog and over Modbus)

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 115 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
CHAPTER 6 TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION PIPELINES

Chapter 6 describes the transmission and distribution pipeline requirements to fulfill intended

quality for a water supply system. The guideline shows the general design requirements for pipeline

size and materials, demand calculations, intended life-time and performance.

This chapter is a standalone chapter and shall be read in line with the requirements of other chapters within this

document “Integrated Water Supply System” as well as with the other publications by Diam e.g. manuals, standard

specifications and drawings.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 116 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
6.1 General

6.1.1 Definitions of various pipelines

The definition of various types and sizes of pipelines are available at the beginning of this document.

6.1.2 Sizing
The design of a pipeline is to be validated systematically by a hydraulic study. The design will be done
taking into account:
 Design criteria;
 Pipeline material.

The following factors should be considered when sizing a pipeline:


 Minimum and maximum pressure;
 The designed capacity (present and projected demand);
 Firefighting requirements;
 Optimum diameter to reduce pipe laying costs;
 Risk of stagnation due to low velocity or water hammer due to high velocity;
 Impact on the upstream and downstream network;
 CAPEX vs OPEX considerations.

Appropriate consideration must be given to the pressure ratings of pipe materials. However, all hydraulic
calculations carried out during design shall be based upon nominal internal diameters.

6.1.3 Pipe alignment and installation


The location of the pipeline and associated equipment must ensure that:
 They are adequately protected (against outside attacks such as traffic, ground contamination
by chemical spillage, physical impact, weather conditions);
 The pipe shall not be exposed to ultra violet light during transport and storage where this would
impair its integrity and projected operating life;
 Away from all existing and proposed utility infrastructures specially wastewater;
 accessibility for the safe operation and maintenance of equipment;
 accessibility for later maintenance and extension works without adverse impact on other
networks belonging to Diam or others;
 minimum impact on the operation and integrity of the existing network during construction work;
 In case of future pipeline failure, the risk of flooding and third-party damage is minimized.

Based on the direction of flow, pipeline profiles with gradual ascents and rapid descents facilitate air
collection at high spots, whilst preventing any air entrainment and the ready evacuation of the pipe for
maintenance. And, as well, at high points after pumps.

Washouts provide for the discharge of water from a pipeline to facilitate emergency repair / maintenance
works, periodical drain to clear deposits and stagnation.

These appurtenances must be sized to allow for the rapid evacuation of air / water. Air valves are meant
for both letting air in and out at the time of refilling and emptying.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 117 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Consequently, the following precautions should be taken:
 Provide the pipeline with a gradient to facilitate upward movement of the air (install with a
minimum gradient of 2 to 3 mm/m);
 Avoid excessive gradient changes caused by following ground contours wherever possible,
particularly for large diameter pipes;
 If the profile is flat, create as many artificial high and low spots as possible, to give
gradients of:
 2 to 3 mm/m in ascending sections;
 4 to 6 mm/m in descending sections.

Extreme care must be taken to ensure that air valve chambers are not flooded as this will permit
contaminated groundwater to enter a pipeline, design shall follow TET/SD/5005.

Pipeline installations should incorporate:

 Appropriately sized automatic air vents at every high point, single/double/combined;


 Adequate wash-out / drain facilities at every low point (if flooding of the washout / drain point is
possible mitigating action must be taken to ensure their ready availability for use).
 In general, air valve must be provided at regular interval of every 500 m - 750 m according to
AWWA M51.

The position of pipe and accessories must be such that:

 Future operational activities can be performed safely;


 Emergency intervention is possible without special equipment;
 The assets (such as valves and hydrants) are accessible at all times.

Pipes should be installed along a pre-arranged route. The preferred location for distribution pipeline in
urban areas is under the footpath. Transmission pipeline must be carefully sited to avoid risk of damage
to third party property in the event of pipe burst. If possible, pipes should not be installed under storm
drains, sewers, major roads, vegetation or parking areas and minimum 5 m away from the compound
premises.

Sometimes, pipeline will cross but in no case should they be installed in a way that makes future
intervention impossible.

The depth of pipeline should be chosen in such way that the slope of the pipeline is as constant as
possible. Unless it is unavoidable the cover over the crown on a pipe is to be as equal as or greater
than 1.0 m. A deeper profile is justified if the environment requires it so as to avoid distortion of the pipe
due to external stresses or the operating conditions is such that it may cause the pipe to be lifted
upwards if there is insufficient weight on it. And to provide the required gradients referred to above.

Normally, DI pipe is able to withstand normal ground pressures. If a polyethylene pipe (PE100) is being
laid, the design of the bedding and backfill is an essential element of the pipe design.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 118 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
6.1.4 Pipeline and broadband duct
The Oman Broadband Company (OBC) is determined to provide broadband services all across Oman.
In order to expedite the implementation of duct and reduce the project managerial process, OBC joined
hands with Diam. As per OBC requirements, pipeline shall be laid along with Diam pipeline in the same
trench (including transmission and distribution). However, the requirements of OBC and its detail
layout/requirements should be discussed with Diam/OBC during the commencement of each project.

6.1.5 Identification of pipeline


6.1.5.1 Warning tape
Warning tape indicates the presence of a pipe and the type of liquid being transported. It must:
 Be immediately recognizable;
 Be visible before excavation reach an area where there is a direct threat of exposing the
pipeline;
 Be installed throughout the length of pipeline;
 Be detectable by pipe locating equipment;
 Have some identification / warning markings on it.

Detailed specification of warning tape is given in Standard Specifications TET/SS/5017.


6.1.5.2 Marking
Marking and numbering of valves and hydrants should be done in an acceptable level. The marking
should indicate all necessary information as mention in TET/SD/5015 to ensure traceability.

6.1.6 Pipe laying techniques


The choice of pipe laying technique is based on the following criteria:
 Pipe diameter;
 Soil types (mountain, gravel plain, tidal, etc.);
 Obstacles (highway, wadis, etc.);
 The length of underground structure requiring access;
 Traffic constraints and traffic loads;
 Proximity of other utility networks;
 Operating constraints of the network;
 Cost.

The different types of execution technique available includes:


 Standard open cut trenching: because of its simplicity and low cost;
 Narrow trenching: a variation of the open cut technique but using specially designed excavators
to minimize the surface area disturbed;
 Trenchless technologies such as micro-tunneling, horizontal direct drilling, thrust boring, etc.
and is especially useful in urban areas;

6.1.7 Accessibility
Every pipe and its associated valves, hydrants etc. should be accessible for maintenance. In these latter
circumstances, consideration must be given and documented to the ability to provide alternative
supplies of water in the event of pipe failure. During the planning and design stages of a project
operations staff must be consulted to obtain local knowledge with respect to this issue.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 119 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
For large diameter pipes (DN ≥ 1200 mm), accessibility not only includes access to the outside of
pipeline but also the inside.

The purpose of this internal accessibility is to:


 Facilitate the diagnosis of external and internal pipe condition in the future;
 Allow the repair and maintenance of the pipe.

Pipes of diameter ≥ 1200 mm must be fitted with blanked off branch tees so that accessing into the pipe
is possible for a man and/or an automated machine carrying a camera without the need to cut the pipe
wall for remote inspections, maintenance, and rehabilitation. Generally, the inspection device can
function even with the pipe full of water. Hence, it is highly desirable to locate the access manhole at
local high points in the pipeline profile, preferably near an isolation/air valve, so that the amount of water
to be evacuated would be less. Preferably, the nominal spacing is up to 2 km but should not exceed 3
km in any case. The typical arrangement of access manhole is indicated below.

6.1.8 Materials
The choice of material must consider the following:
 Meteorological conditions which may lead to ground movement / exposure to direct sunlight;
 Soil condition that could cause external corrosion;
 Hydraulic capacity (internal diameter);
 Lifetime of the pipeline to ensure an adequate return on the investment;
 Maintenance and repair of the pipe material;
 Possibility of the future installation of additional branch connections, valves etc.;
 Suitability to use in potable water;
 Cost.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 120 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Diam recommend the following:
 Distribution pipes
o PE 100 up to 300 mm diameter (OD 110 mm, 180 mm and 225 mm shall be used);
o Ductile Iron (DI) above 300 mm diameter;
o And DI for special locations like road/wadi crossings.
 Transmission Lines
o Ductile Iron up to 1000 mm diameter;
o Above 1000 mm dia. comparison should be made with CS (according to API 5L)
pipes (generally epoxy coated in and out or 3 layers PPE);
o In special cases like high pressure, small diameter pipes CS pipes may also be
used.

Pre-stressed concrete and glass fiber reinforced epoxy (GRE) pipes are acceptable alternatives.
However, the value of the material shall be evaluated in a feasibility study showing life cycle cost
analysis. In the past, other materials such as PVC, Asbestos Cement, Galvanized iron and MDPE were
used but these are no longer in use.

In life cycle assessment, gate-to-gate concept shall be used, i.e. from procurement of the product to its
end of life as an asset in Diam. This is including CAPEX, OPEX, environmental impact, mitigation of
risk and salvage value (if rehabilitation or reuse worth).

Each type of pipelines has a pressure class also known as a pressure rating (normally measured in
bar). This is a measure of the maximum operating pressure that a pipe can withstand without failing.

Pipelines can normally survive transient pressures in excess of this for short periods of time. These
higher pressures are normally the result of pressure surge caused by sudden changes of rate of flows
on the network associated with pumps switching on and off or valves suddenly opening and closing.

If operating pressures, pumping conditions, etc. are likely to cause surges of pressure in excess of the
pipe rating or negative pressure; then surge protection facilities should be considered.

6.1.9 Pipeline connection


The connection between pipe elements must make a water-tight joint and, if a flexible pipe, allow for
movement between the pipes:
 Ensure the durability of the installation;
 Minimize space requirement (space taken by the installation);
 Allow for future maintenance.

6.1.10 Self-anchored joints


The thrust is generated in water supply system where pipe changes in direction, varying cross section,
branch off-takes and dead ends. In general, volume of thrust block (for acute bends and high pressure)
is more and size may not fit in especially in urban areas where the space is a constraint. In this case,
self-anchoring is an alternative to using concrete anchor blocks to absorb hydraulic thrust forces.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 121 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
It is an attractive option when there are restrictions, notably in urban areas, when it is difficult to obtain
sufficient quantities of concrete. It is also time saving when pipe laying and allows pipes to be tested
immediately after being laid as there is no need to wait for concrete to set.

6.1.11 Anchor (Thrust) blocks


If self-anchoring is not used, then anchor blocks must be provided at each change of direction, horizontal
and vertical, and pipe termination (bends, tees, end plugs, etc.). Also, at in-line valves, are to be made
of concrete, designed to withstand the test pressure of the system and take into consideration the depth
of pipe and type of soil against which the block is to thrust. Care must be taken to ensure that the soil
behind a thrust has not and will not be disturbed by, for example, another service trench and any other
nearby property.

The block is to be designed for submerged ground conditions, if appropriate. For large diameter pipes,
thrust blocks are structural elements and should be designed as a structure. Thrust block can also
designed to be vertical so as to save the horizontal space for other utilities.

6.1.12 Joints
Installation of joints shall be according to AWWA M11. Joints should be flexible when rigid pipe elements
are installed in unstable soil. However, when flexible pipes are used, the connection will be made by
using electro fusion weld fittings (couplers, elbows and tees) or butt fusion welding.

6.1.13 Valves
Isolating valves (gate valves, butterfly valves) allow for the operation of the network, its protection and
its hydraulic isolation when necessary. Gate valves with flanged joints shall be used on pipelines ≤ DN
400. For pipelines above DN 400, butterfly valves shall be used.

Specifications of all valves are given in the Diam Standard Specifications.

The frequency of in-line isolation valves should be determined for each pipeline and shall be located
strategically in such a way that the evacuation of water from the pipeline between two isolation valves
shall not exceed 3 hours. The maximum distance between isolation valves on the transmission pipelines
is detailed in Table 6.1. Noting that the maximum distance is 1 km for distribution lines.
Table 6.1. Distance between isolation valves on transmission pipelines

Pipe size (mm) Max. distance "m"


150 to 500 5000
600 to 1200 3000
1300 2750
1400 2400
1500 2100
1600 to 1700 2000

Valves should be installed so that, where possible, all parts of the network can be controlled without
adversely affecting another part. As a minimum requirement valves shall be installed:

 On all branch connections;


 On all branches from feeder pipeline;
 Not less than 2 valves at a tee;
 Not less than 3 valves at a cross.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 122 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
The following types of valves are used in a water supply system:

 Isolating valves (Gate valves, butterfly valves);


 Non-return valves;
 Air release valves;
 Washout valves;
 Pressure regulating valves;
 Flow control valves.

Dismantling joints shall be used at each valve to facilitate the easy removal of a valve from pipeline.
This ensures consistency of equipment used on the network to facilitate maintenance.

Valves shall be operable from the surface using the means by which they were designed to be operated
and equipped with a protection tube / chamber and surface box.

For DN > 400 the valve must have a smaller diameter by-pass valve. This allows ease operating of the
valve and the pipeline to be filled with minimum risk after repair or maintenance. Valves with integrated
by-pass are also acceptable.

6.1.13.1 Isolating valve


Isolating valves shall:
 Be readily accessible for operations at all times;
 Be easily operable by the means they were designed to be operated (secure and safe when
operating);
 Always have the same direction of closure;
 Be operated in a way that does not create water hammer.
6.1.13.2 Manual valve
All manual valve should be clockwise operation for closing.
6.1.13.3 Motorized valve
The operation of valve using an electric actuator shall be considered in cases where:
 Operation of a valve could cause risk of injury to the operator;
 Remote control of a valve is desirable for control purposes.

If electric actuators are used, following conditions are to be considered:


 Identify if there is any flood risk to cables and switchgear;
 Provide electrical isolation switches in a position that permits their safe operation;
 Have the electrical system accessible for maintenance and verification;
 Make operation and testing simple and convenient.
6.1.13.4 Non-return valves
The non-return valves permit a fluid flow in one direction only. They are used in pumping stations in the
pressure line to prevent a reverse flow in the pumps, and to ensure the correct flow of water into and
out of storage reservoirs.
6.1.13.5 Air valves
Air valves are designed to perform the following:

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 123 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 During filling, to remove the air present in the pipelines;
 Under working conditions to remove air that accumulates at high points;
 When a pipeline is emptied air must be admitted to break the vacuum and allow the water to be
drained rapidly.

Air valves are located at high points of pipelines and in long ascending stretches of moderate slope
(about 2 degrees) at intervals of 500 - 750 m. Also, where abrupt changes of slope exist, an air valve is
to be installed.
6.1.13.6 Washout valves
Washout valves should be installed at all low points and at the termination point of dead-ends to make
water disposal easier and more convenient. If flooding of the washout / drain point is possible, mitigating
action must be taken to ensure their ready availability for use.
6.1.13.7 Pressure regulating valves
Pressure reducing and pressure sustaining valves are installed following detailed modelling of
anticipated pressures in the system. They are used to control the pipeline pressure downstream and
upstream of the valve and facilitate the management of pressure to prevent over pressurization and/or
to maintain the adequate supply pressures. For example, in distribution networks with large differences
in ground level, the water pressure at low points can be higher than desired leading to higher rates of
water loss and increased numbers of leakages.
6.1.13.8 Equipment for operating valves
All valves must be capable of being operated with a standard operating ‘’Tee’’ key with standard square
cap. Where this is not possible the square operating cap of a valve should be equipped with a telescopic
/ fixed length operating unit.

6.1.14 Metering
Metering is essential if the performance of transmission and distribution of the networks are to be
calculated. The results of these calculations can then be used to prioritize where field investigations
need to be carried out based upon the performance level of the associated networks.

Meters should be installed at the following locations in order that the performance of the networks can
be calculated.
 Production sites;
 Reservoir inlet and outlet;
 Pumping station outlet;
 Tanker filling stations;
 Bulk off takes;
 District metered areas inlet.

6.1.15 Fire hydrants


Firefighting demands should be taken into consideration in the design of water distribution networks.

For each project, the location of a fire hydrant is determined in coordination with the Public Authority for
Civil Defense and Ambulance (PACDA).

After installation, each fire hydrant shall be checked and approved by the competent authority and
certificate from PACDA is to be obtained by the Contractor.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 124 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Pillar type hydrants shall be installed adjacent to public roads.

Fire hydrant shall be on a pipe not less than 100 mm diameter. The operating pressure of the nearby
line should not go less than 1.5 bar when the fire hydrant is used at the rate of 60 m3/h.

Specification of fire hydrant is given in the Standard Specifications TET-SS-5024.

6.1.16 Network protection


6.1.16.1 Protection against corrosion for pipes
This is a highly specialized area so the following points are only general guidelines. If corrosion
protection in addition to that provided by the manufacture of the pipe / components is believed to be
needed, expert assistance should be employed during the design stage.

Otherwise, all pipes and other components susceptible to corrosion shall be provided with adequate
protection during manufacturing. For example, coating or resin with PPE layers. During installation great
care must be taken to avoid damaging protective coatings.
6.1.16.2 Cathodic protection for steel pipes
Cathodic protection is a technique used to control corrosion of a metal surface by making it the cathode
of an electrochemical cell.

A cathodic protection system shall be installed to protect and monitor the pipeline. All work related to
cathodic protection systems shall be designed and supervised by a specialist. The work shall be based
upon the guidelines for best practices as detailed in International Standards. A temporary cathodic
protection system shall be provided during the construction period. Details are provided in CHAPTER
7.

6.2 Accessories

6.2.1 Nuts, Bolts and Washers


Unless otherwise specified, nuts, bolts and washers shall conform to the requirements of International
Standards. All nuts, bolts and washers shall resist corrosion and long-term deterioration. Where it is
necessary due to ground conditions or the requirements of the pipeline specification, the nuts, bolts and
washers shall be of stainless-steel grade SS316.

Bolts shall be of sufficient length that a minimum of one thread shall show through the nut when in the
fully tightened condition.

All nuts and bolts that will be directly buried in the ground shall be adequately protected with an
approved protection system applied in compliance with Diam standard specifications. Any such system
must protect the nuts and bolts for a period equivalent to the design life of the pipe.

6.2.2 Gaskets and joint rings


All joints shall be made in accordance with manufacturer`s instructions.

Until required for incorporation in a joint, every joint ring, gasket, etc., shall be stored in accordance with
the International Standards and manufacturer’s recommendation. If there is any contradiction, the
Project Engineer shall determine which is to be followed. Generally joint rings, gaskets, lubricants and

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 125 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
jointing compounds shall be stored in a cool, dry place that is protected from adverse weather
conditions.

Only lubricants and jointing compounds recommended by the manufacturer shall be used in connection
with the joint ring and these lubricants shall be approved by the Diam laboratory manager as suitable
for use on drinking water pipelines.

Flange gasket and joint rings should be manufactured from Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer
(EPDM) rubber conforming to International Standards and shall be a minimum of 3 mm thick.

6.3 Pipe Storage


Prior to use, pipes and fittings (valves, hydrants etc.) shall be stored in a safe, neat and tidy manner
and in conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. The open ends of all pipes and fittings
shall be covered in such a way as to prevent the ingress of water, animals, insects and children.

6.4 Hydraulic Calculation


Hydraulic design of pipelines shall follow the principle described in CHAPTER 1 (section 1.7 ) that insists
using a recognized hydraulic modelling software or using manufacturer`s tables or graphs. Detailed
calculations are required to assess head loss through fittings, etc. within pumping stations and similar
locations.
The head losses due to the flow through bends, tees, entrances, sudden enlargements, sudden
contractions, valves, etc. shall be considered.

6.4.1 Hydraulic thrust


Hydraulic thrust forces occur at changes in direction, reductions in diameter (bends, tees, tapers) and
at the end of pipelines carrying water under pressure. Thrust pressures can be high and, to prevent
failure of the pipeline, shall be counterbalanced by appropriately anchored jointing systems, or by
anchor blocks.

Various types of concrete anchor blocks can be designed, depending on the configuration of pipeline,
strength and type of soil, presence, or absence, of significant amounts of ground water. The anchor
blocks shall be designed to withstand the thrust force, either by bearing on side of the trench, if the soil
is sufficiently resistant, or by their own weight or can be vertical fixed in soil.

Standards for anchors and thrust block are shown in the Standard Drawings TET/SD/5027.

6.4.2 Water hammer (Surge)


Although some pipe materials are able to resist certain values of water hammer surges. It is usually
more economic and reliable to provide the pipe system with a surge protection device.

Protective systems shall be installed to limit water hammer to an acceptable level. They shall act by
slowing the change in fluid velocity or by limiting the pressure surge in relation to the pressure drop.

The designer shall determine the pressure surge and pressure drop envelope created by water hammer
and judge, according to the pipe profile, the type of protection to be installed:
 Pump inertia impellor;
 Pressure relief valve;
 Air or “automatic air control” bladder (surge vessel);

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 126 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 Auxiliary suction;
 A balancing column.

The anti-water hammer bladders mostly frequently used. It has two functions:
 Limit the pressure surge (head loss controlled by a check valve);
 Prevent cavitation (balloon drainage).

In the event of a sudden pump shutdown, the pressure drop is offset by a flow rate provided by draining
the balloon.

When the direction of water flow reverses, the energy in the water mass is transformed into a head loss
by filling the bladder through a calibrated check valve.

Where surge vessels are used for surge protection, the pipeline pressures shall not fall below 5 m gauge
at the pipe centerline level except at location closer than 20% of the total pipeline length to a control
such as a delivery reservoir or a surge feed tank where the pressures shall not fall below 2 meters
gauge.

6.5 Pipe Installation

Any project should be subject to geotechnical study prior to its commencement. This study allows for
difficulties to be anticipated and technical proposals to be submitted to counter them.
Pipeline route approval shall be obtained from the concerned authorities and land owners and those
who rent.

A survey shall be undertaken to show the locations, dimensions and level of all services and
obstructions in the pipeline route.

A resistivity survey (every 500 m) shall be undertaken along the metallic pipeline route and at all wadi
crossings.

Representative soil surveys shall be carried out along the pipe route to identify contamination that may
cause undue deterioration to the pipeline or contamination of the water it transports.

6.5.1 Excavation
All required authorizations from local authorities or other utilities should be obtained before starting
excavation work. Based on information gathered from local authorities / utilities exploration and
excavations should be made to determine the precise location and scale of obstructions and other
utilities.

However, before any excavation can be carried out, the ground must be checked for the possibility of
other utilities, third party intrusions or other risks, soft ground, shingle, proximity of structures, etc. This
is normally undertaken at the planning stage where necessary utility plans and drawings must be
obtained if this is impossible due to restrictions or lack of records the following should be carried out:

 Visual Inspection of the area to ensure that there are no drains, manholes, telegraph or
overhead cable poles, ditches, trees or other obstacles that can cause problems during

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 127 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
excavation. Move up to 100 meters away in a circular motion where practicable when
checking;
 Cable location devices (cat and gen) should be used and any findings must be drawn on the
ground prior to excavation;
 Trial holes should be dug on the line of excavation by hand at intervals of 5 meters or less if
traversing major roads, junctions, paths etc.;
 Only when this is carried out should the ground be deemed safe to dig. Where obstacle is
found digging should be by hand only.

Bulk excavation is usually carried out by a machine. When this is not possible, then, hand excavation
must be used. Diam’s Consultant shall decide whether and where hand excavation is required in line
with international guidelines set out in New Road and Street Works Act 1991 (NRSWA). Where utilities
or other buried services are known then hand digging should occur within the last 500 mm of the buried
service ensuring that the service is dug around and supported by straps or strops every 2 meters in an
open excavation.

All required authorizations from local authorities or other utilities should be obtained before starting the
work. Based on information gathered from local authorities / utilities exploration and excavations should
be made to determine the precise location and scale of obstructions and other utilities.

All the necessary precautions shall be taken not to disturb archaeological remains and historical sites
in the vicinity of the works. If any important and historical things are discovered, the Diam`s Engineer
and the department of Archeology and Antiquities of the Ministry of National Heritage and Culture shall
be informed.

If the installation is under the road, and in order not to extensively damage the road surface, the trench
edges shall be pre-cut using abrasive wheels. The width of this is to be sufficiently greater than the
trench width to avoid disturbance to the remaining road surface during excavation.
Trenches shall be excavated to the required line and level as shown on the approved drawings.

The contractor shall deploy appropriate dewatering equipment to keep the excavations free from water
from whatever source, so that the works shall be constructed in dry conditions. Only under exceptional
circumstances will approval be given to proceed with water within an excavation.

In exceptional circumstances, the use of explosives will be permitted. The contractor shall obtain all
necessary authorizations from the relevant authorities and make himself familiar with all current
regulations of the Royal Oman Police. The explosives shall be stored in an appropriate and secure
magazine. The contractor shall employ staff who are qualified and experienced in the use of explosives
and who have all relevant approvals in writing from the applicable authorities, for handling explosives
and blasting.

Where excavated material does not meet the requirements of NRSWA 1991, to be re-used in the
excavation, the contractor shall be responsible for the disposal of surplus excavated material in an
environmentally acceptable manner to an off-site location. The contractor shall present his proposals
for such disposal to Diam for approval before commencing excavation works. No excavated material
suitable for reuse in the works shall be removed from the site except on the direction, or with the
permission, in writing of the engineer.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 128 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
In all cases where there is a risk of subsidence from trench walls or other ground problems the use of
trench support systems must be used.

In all cases trenches of over 1.30 meters deep and with a width equal to or less than two-thirds of the
depth must, when their walls are vertical or substantially vertical be adequately supported.

6.5.2 Trench width


The trench width depends on the diameter of the pipe, the type of connection, the type of soil, the laying
depth and the methods of shoring and compaction.

In all cases the trench shall be excavated with sufficient width to ensure that efficient laying and jointing
of the pipes and associated pipeline components is possible. The clear width of the trench throughout
its depth shall be as per TET/SD/5019. To reduce the cost of excavation, and backfill, narrow trench
techniques can be used.

During the execution of the work:


 Trench walls should be stabilized either by battering or shoring (supporting);
 Edges of the excavation should be cleared of lumps of rock or clods of earth to prevent them
from falling;
 Excavated material should be deposited at least the same distance away as that of the trench
for example if the trench is 1.2 meters deep the excavation material should be 1.2 meters from
the trench`s edge, if a trench is more than 4 meters deep and wide then the Excavated material
should be moved at least 10 meters from the excavation or removed completely from site to a
storage area;
 Where the excavation is known to impinge on neighbouring properties or businesses then paths
shall be designated around the works and be signed and guarded in line with NRSWA (only in
exceptional circumstances should the works be broken by bridging walkways) in this instance
temporary bridges shall be installed to allow workers and pedestrians to cross the trench safely;
 Ladders shall be provided to allow access and egress from trenches but must be secured and
protrude at least 4 rungs above the height of the trench they must not be worked off.

6.5.3 Trench depth


Pipes shall be installed at 1.0 m cover from the top of the pipe to the finished ground level and shall not
exceed 5 m, except with a special permission from –Water Utility. In certain cases, with the written
permission of the engineer, pipes can be raised or lowered to cross obstructions. In the case of reduced
cover depth, the pipe shall be encased in concrete as specified by Diam engineer.

Where trenches are required to be deeper than the general depth, the trench shall be excavated to the
required depth with a gradual slope to permit the proper laying of the pipeline.

Additional excavations will have to be carried out to provide extra space around joints when necessary
and to suit local circumstances.

The minimum horizontal distance between a water pipeline and other utilities shall be 0.5 m except
sewer and Oman electrical standards. For more details see standard drawing Typical Pipe Laying
TET/SD/5019.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 129 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
6.5.4 Safety in excavations
At all times, the safety of those working in trenches is paramount. Appropriate protection against trench
collapse must be used in cases prescribed in existing regulations, or, in general, when demanded by
the nature of the soil.

6.5.5 Trench safety


a) Battering
This method is most often used in soils prone to slippage and consists of giving the trench walls an
outward slope which must be close to the internal friction angle (angle of repose) of the soil.

This angle varies with the type of soil and will need to be determined on site through trials before allowing
workers to enter the trench. This solution is rarely used in urban areas because of the space needed.

Battering of trench sides is an accepted method of protecting workers against the risk of trench collapse.
No excavation with battered sides shall be made in roads, footpaths, private gardens, or within safe
distance nearby buildings or structures.

b) Shoring
There are numerous shoring techniques. It is important to study and adopt the best system for the
location before starting the work.

The most common shoring techniques are:


 prefabricated wooden panels (joined or single);
 wooden or metal sheeting;
 pile driven sheets;
 hydraulically operated trench boxes.

Whichever technique is used, the earth pressure has to be taken into consideration. The shoring must
be capable of resisting the full thrust of the ground over its full height.

For the installation of shoring permanent overload, vibrations from vehicles, excavation machines and
work equipment movements should be considered. The shoring must be modified to suit the nature of
soil. Sufficient drainage must be provided in case of infiltration and runoff.

The trench support must be inspected prior, during and after use to ensure integrity.

6.5.6 Pipe bed


If the material in the trench bottom is considered unsuitable as a bedding material, it shall be removed
and replaced to a depth of at least 0.15 m beneath the bottom of the pipe. A material such as pea gravel
shall be used for pipe bedding. Exceptionally sand may be used subject to this being evenly spread
across the bottom of the trench to provide full support along the full length of the pipe. Depressions shall
be formed at each joint to prevent these creating stresses in the pipeline. Bedding materials must not
be sourced from any location where they may have been subject to salt water infiltration or
contamination with chemicals or any other substance.

In all cases care must be taken to ensure that the external wall of the pipe is not in contact with hard
items such as rock, buried masonry, etc.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 130 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
6.5.7 Pipe laying
All pipes should be laid according to International Standards and manufacturer’s recommendations.

The trench bottom must be levelled to comply with the approved drawings. Ensuring that the pipe rests
on the uniformly distributed pipe bedding material as described above. The pipes shall be laid accurately
to the lines and levels shown on the drawings within a tolerance of ± 5 mm.

All pipes shall be laid and maintained to the approved alignments and grades ensuring that the pipe is
properly bedded along its whole length. Pipe alignments shall be straight between bends or curves.
Deviation from this principle shall only be allowed, following approval of thrust restraining proposals,
where shown on drawings, to comply with detailed specifications to the contrary, or with the written
agreement of the project engineer.

Pipes must be handled, stored and clad in conditions that will not allow deterioration of the pipe material
to the extent that it may adversely impact on its future operational life. Pipes must be lifted and hauled
using devices that will not cause any damage to the pipe itself or to its protective coating / cladding.
Particular attention is to be paid to maintaining the original geometry of the pipe sockets and spigots.

When the requirements of the installation make this necessary it is allowable to make cuts of pipes.
Every precaution must be taken that this is done using approved tools / equipment for the pipe material
in question and is only done when necessary.

Cuts are to be made using equipment approved for use on water networks that do not contaminate the
internal surfaces of the pipe and do not reduce the physical strength of the pipe. Cuts of appropriate
geometry shall be made that are formed to fit with the adjacent assembly and are of the same quality
as the original spigot of the pipe.

Before installation, the pipes are to be checked both internally and externally for damage to pipe
coatings and linings. The interior of the pipe shall be cleared of all debris that could have been
introduced and the ends of the pipe cleaned.

During installation pipes and other pipeline components shall be aligned as per the recommendations
of the manufacturers and in all cases within the limits detailed in best practice manuals.

During excavation, pipe laying, backfilling and reinstatement temporary support shall be provided to all
other utility infrastructure in consultation with the relevant utility managers.

Where installation of the pipe to the defined grade or alignment is obstructed by existing utilities, (such
as conduits, ducts, pipes, etc.) the owners / managers of these utilities shall be consulted to determine
the most effective way of resolving such obstructions. If the obstructing utilities are to be supported,
removed or realigned this will be done to the specification of the owner / manager of the utility in
question.

At the end of each working day, the ends of the pipes being laid are to be sealed using water tight caps
to prevent ingress of water, animals, etc.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 131 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Wherever pipe coatings, internal and external are damaged these shall be repaired to the specification
of the manufacturer. If this is not possible, the pipe / pipeline component is to be discarded and disposed
of in a manner that prevents it inadvertently being used elsewhere.

Where manufactures specify that deviation at pipe joints is permissible the deflection at each joint shall
not exceed the manufacturer’s recommendation.

6.5.8 Backfilling
When backfilling the trench, the Highway Authorities and Utilities Committee (HAUC) report (NRSWA
1991) should be used for guidance of the fill material and required strengths of ground support. All
materials must meet the requirements of Class A Graded Granular Materials that should not contain
any particles greater than 75 mm nominal size.

As soon as practicable, trench sections of installed pipes shall be partially backfilled to avoid pipeline
flotation whilst, where possible, leaving joints open. Completed sections of the pipe shall be closed by
blank flanges or cap ends that are restrained to resist test pressures.

Backfilling shall be done in two stages:


1. Backfilling with pipe surround, leaving joints open for testing procedures where possible. The
pipe surround material shall be the same as that used for the pipe bed and shall provide a
minimum of 150 mm protection to the at the sides and 300 mm (after compaction) above the
pipe, the pipe surround shall be compacted in 150 mm deep layers to ensure uniform pipe
support and protection;
2. Final backfilling of all sections still exposed after successful testing.

In cases such as where narrow trenching or trenchless installation techniques are used that preclude
the provision of the pipe surround as stipulated above the contractor shall formulate proposals for the
equivalent protection of the pipeline. These proposals are subject to approval by Diam before being
implemented.

Appropriate backfill material that complies with the requirements of the relevant street managers shall
be imported and compacted in layers not exceeding 150mm.

Road surfaces shall then be replaced using materials and methods that comply with the requirements
of the street managers / land owners.

All material shall be of a consistency that permits its adequate compaction around and under the pipes
and fittings and to support the trench surface without subsequent subsidence. (For further guidance see
Road and Wadi crossing section below).

If the pipe is to be laid in open ground the compaction of backfilling material may not be required.

The balance of the backfill to the final ground level shall only be carried out using approved fill. Backfill
material shall not be unsuitable / unwanted excavated material. This should be disposed of away from
the site as described earlier.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 132 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
The minimum and maximum depth of backfill depends on the pipe characteristics, laying conditions,
bed zone and surround zone conditions, pipe stability and/ or protection. It`s execution must meet
variable demands depending on the:
 Pipe characteristics (rigid, semi-rigid, flexible);
 External loadings (depth of cover, wheel loads);
 More or less rocky or heterogeneous nature of the ground.

The main backfill zone varies according to the area involved (rural, semi-urban or urban), and should
take road stability into account.

6.6 Road and Wadi Crossings

If this section contradicts the Backfilling section above in any way then the requirements of this section
shall prevail.

The disruption to road traffic should be minimal and before starting all permissions from authorities
must be obtained.

6.6.1 Road crossings


Wherever possible trenchless techniques are to be used for pipelines crossing under existing roads. In
exceptional cases, the excavation of existing roads is allowed and for these cases. The following
requirements shall be followed:

The road shall be reinstated using the form of construction and materials as per Oman Highway Design
Manual issued by Ministry of Transport (MoT) and the Regional Municipality.

Bedding and jointing shall be as specified, but the trench re-filling shall be carried out using granular
bedding material and compacted at the sides of the pipes to not less than 95% of the maximum dry
density as specified by the compaction test.

Above this, 250 mm layer concrete Class 20/20 shall be placed to bring the level of the backfill up to
100 mm below the finished road surface. This method of backfilling shall be applied to an extent of at
least 2 m either side of the surfaced road carriageway.

Immediately after the backfilling of trenches, roads, pavements and verges are restored temporarily
using the materials of the pavement stockpiled during the excavation if these are suitable for reuse.

The replacement of the road structure shall be carried out as soon as practicable after backfilling has
been completed. Suitable excavated road pavement which complies with the MoT / Regional
Municipality shall be used at the sub-base levels. Compaction shall be carried out with approved
mechanical compacting equipment.

Any part of the structure of the road which has been damaged beyond the width of the trench must be
cut out and made good to the same specification.

A vertical joint shall be formed between the new work and the existing road surface and shall be painted
with hot bitumen or as required by Authority and the base course and wearing course stepped 75 mm.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 133 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Where the carriageway surface adjoining the trench is of rolled asphalt the contractor shall lay an interim
wearing course of Class 20/20 concrete 100 mm thick. At a later date (to be decided by the Engineer)
the temporary wearing course may be removed and replaced with 2 layers of 50 mm of rolled asphalt.

The finished levels of the completed reinstatement shall conform to the adjoining carriageway surface.

Reinstatement of wearing courses shall match as nearly as practicable the colour and/or other
characteristics of the existing surface after making appropriate allowance for the effects of weathering
on existing surfaces.

6.6.2 Crossing through existing ducts / culverts


Where ducts / culverts have been installed by the responsible Authority, the exact location should be
identified and detailed on construction drawings. For the construction of these crossings the pipes, shall
depending upon the pipe material, be pulled or pushed through the ducts, taking special precautions to
ensure the integrity of the pipeline is not impaired.

Protection around the pipe should be provided to prevent damage to couplings whilst being pulled. Also,
(or in conjunction with,) special supports shall be provided to fix the pipe into the duct as well as prevent
the pipe from resting on the pipe joints and creating undue stress in the pipe barrel. Details of the
proposed arrangement including the pipeline support method shall be submitted to Diam for approval.

After finishing the pipe sections in the duct and thorough inspection / approval of the work, both ends of
the duct shall be sealed by casting lean concrete. Pipe ends protruding from the duct ends shall rest on
thoroughly compacted soil.

A separate pressure test shall be carried out for the sections of pipe inside the duct to ensure the
integrity of the pipe and that correct installation has been achieved.

Valves shall be installed either side of major road crossings to permit the isolation of the pipeline under
the road.

6.6.3 Wadi crossings


The wadi crossings shall meet the following requirements:
 Ductile Iron pipes and fittings shall be used over the length of wadi crossings plus 15 m on either
side. The use of mechanical or detachable joints are necessary;
 Wadi protection is to be designed according to Diam standard drawings TET/SD/5013;
 Wadi protection shall de designed to prevent flotation of the pipeline in the event of flooding
while the pipe is empty;
 Wadi crossings in soft soil will be constructed with a minimum cover of 2 meters;
 Valves shall be installed either side of active and major wadi crossings to permit the isolation of
the pipeline under the wadi;
 No valve chambers or marker posts shall be constructed in the wadi bed or on the embankments
of the wadi;
 All valves and marker posts must be visible and fully accessible when the Wadi is in flood.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 134 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
6.6.4 Valve Chambers and Surface Boxes

Valves shall be placed at the locations specified on the plans unless agreed in writing by the project
engineer in consultation with Diam operations staff.

Valves shall be installed in one the following ways:


 Buried with a surface box for isolating / shut off valves;
 In a chamber of appropriate design and construction for its location.

Buried valves shall be installed with an access tube and surface box. Only those valves mentioned
below shall be installed in a chamber:
 Motorized operated valves;
 Isolating valves either side of major obstructions (wadis, major roads, etc.) where facility is made
to temporarily maintain supplies in the event of pipe failure under the obstruction;
 Air release valves;
 Washouts;
 Valves on deep lines (> 2.50 m) where it is difficult to maintain access for operation through
surface box;
 Valves located on unstable ground, embankments etc.;
 PRVs.

For all valves, a metal surface box shall be installed that closely fits the tube / chamber and restricts the
ingress of dust, debris, insects and animals. Surface boxes shall be designed to be height adjustable.

All surface boxes and chamber cover are installed to provide access to valves and shall be capable of
withstanding the anticipated traffic loading for the location.

Valves in chambers shall be installed using dismantling joints unless the design of the valve allows
replacement of internal parts without removing the valve from the pipeline. Dismantling joints, if fitted,
must be in the chamber.

GPS coordinates (X, Y, Z) of each valve shall be shown on drawings and recorded in the GIS.

Valve chambers shall be constructed with reinforced cement concrete (RCC) or pre-casted RCC
components, and are based generally on the ground.

If man entry is required into valve chamber, the chamber shall be of sufficient dimensions depending
upon the size of the valve/s, waterproof, equipped with heavy duty Ductile Iron (DI) cover and frame
and a sump of 300 x 300 x 300 mm dimensions.

Manhole covers shall be with Class D 400 in DI with round frame. The minimum opening dimensions
are 600 mm, 700 mm and 800 mm. The cover shall have lifting eyes, a reliable locking system, sound
proofing ring for stability and silence and optional anti-theft system.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 135 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
6.7 Hydraulic Testing

Hydraulic testing is used to confirm the water tightness of pipes and fittings. A minimum of 48 hours’
notice must be provided to Diam of the proposed date of a hydrostatic test. These tests shall be carried
out during normal working hours unless agreed in writing by Diam.

After a new pipeline has been filled hydrostatic tests must be performed to ensure that the pipeline is
properly constructed before final acceptance. The testing shall be carried out according to ISO 10802.

Before any testing is commenced, pipelines to be tested shall be filled with water and left to stand for at
least 24 hours under a static pressure equivalent to the intended working pressure in that section of the
pipeline. After this, the line shall be subject to pressure and leakage tests.

Testing shall be carried out in two stages:


1. Test of sections as construction proceeds (500 m maximum), leaving joints open and thrust
anchoring of cap ends if required,
2. Final test of the whole system on completion.

The pressure test is applied to the pipeline by means of a continuously operating pump, equipped with
a by-pass valve for regulating pressure. Attention must be given that the pipeline is filled at a rate which
will not cause any surges, and which will ensure a proper air release.

The section being tested is gradually filled with water from the lowest point to aid the release of air.

All air must be released through hydrants and air valves installed for that purpose. Physical inspection
of washouts and air valves must be made during pipe filling to confirm that all entrained air is released.

After checking for visible leaks, the full pressure test must be maintained for four continuous hours. The
recommended test pressure is working pressure x 1.5 subject to a minimum of 10 bar at the highest
point of the pipeline.

The test shall be recorded using electronic pressure data loggers capable of operating within the
pressure test range.

The contractor shall design and document the testing procedure for approval by the Engineer at least 7
working days before the proposed date for pressure testing. All the material for testing shall be supplied
by the contractor and submitted to the Engineer for approval.

Before takeover of a distribution network, hydraulic testing should be carried out either:

 If the working pressure is less than 6 bar, the testing pressure should be 10 bar,
 If the working pressure is more than 7 bars, the testing pressure should be working pressure x
1.5.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 136 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
6.8 Disinfection and Flushing

After the hydraulic test and swabbing is completed and approved the pipes shall be disinfected, flushed
and sampled.

Any component used in the water system shall be fully disinfected and have the hygiene clearance from
Diam.

Systems shall be admitted into service only once sampling results confirmed correct disinfection.
Procedure shall be repeated if sampling results show contamination.

6.9 Design of Water Transmission Pipelines

The primary function of transmission pipelines is to transport large volumes of water between sources
and distribution systems possibly over significant distances. They normally have few connections made
from them.

Water transmission pipelines transport water from the source (water treatment plant, storage reservoir)
to the service / storage reservoir. Their operational functionality dictates that each transmission pipeline
is individually designed to meet the requirements of the storage systems associated with it in balancing
it.

The flow of water in transmission systems is normally more constant than that in distribution systems in
that they are used to fill reservoirs and when the reservoir is full the pumps that drive the water through
the transmission system are shut down. The effect is that the water is either flowing through the
transmission pipe at a consistent rate and pressure or there is no flow at all.

The design should be done by a software that implementing hydraulic modelling according to
CHAPTER 1 taking into account pipe material, laying, maintenance costs and energy costs (pumping).

For optimal size of pipe, the parameters of length, static pump head and quantity of water being
transferred should be considered. Changes in elevation along the length of the transmission pipeline
are critical in its design.

In a pipeline, the velocity should be between 1 and 1.8 m/s (reaching a maximum of 2.0 m/s for short
sections of pipeline in exceptional circumstances) with friction losses not be more than 0.5 bar over
1000 meters.

6.9.1 Valves on transmission system


a) Isolating valves
See also section 6.1.13.1 .

Isolating valves should be placed according to the following guidelines:


 Preferably at a uniform distance from, and adjacent to, pipe intersections;
 At intervals with a maximum interval of 3 - 5 kilometers depending on the terrain and ease of
access.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 137 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 For DN ≥ 400 the valve must have a smaller diameter by-pass valve. This allows ease operating
of the valve and the pipeline to be filled with minimum risk after repair or maintenance. Valves
with integrated by-pass are also acceptable. Bypass valves have the following sizes:

Valve Size Bypass size


DN 400 DN 50
DN 500 – DN 600 DN 80
DN 800 – DN 1000 DN 100
DN 1200 – DN 1600 DN 150
Isolating valves shall be butterfly valves manufactured with double flanges.

b) Air valves
See section 6.1.13.5 above.

c) Washout valves
See section 6.1.13.6 above.

d) Pressure regulating valves


See section 6.1.13.7 above.

6.10 Design of Water Distribution Pipelines


The design of a distribution system is governed by following factors:
 Pipe size;
 Reservoir location;
 Minimum and maximum pressure required;
 Pressure variations.

A proper design involves minimizing investment and operating costs by optimizing these factors. Due
consideration should also be given to possible staged development of the network to manage
expenditure profiles.

Ideally the reservoir should be located on strategical point to equalize distribution flows and pressures.

The flow of water in distribution systems can vary greatly from the peak hours, when a lot of water is
used for washing or drinking, to the minimum consumption hours, which are normally at night.

Service reservoirs play an important role in the relationship between transmission and distribution
systems to balance the fluctuations of the water demand from customers that a treatment plant may not
be able to meet.

Reservoirs should be placed at a higher elevation than the distribution area, but as close as possible to
it to avoid unnecessary pumping and transmission line cost. If the area is flat, elevated tanks shall to be
used. Elevated tanks are generally smaller than ground reservoirs and serve to balance demand
variations in localized areas.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 138 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
The pressure needed for the distribution system can be obtained using the following systems:

 Gravity system: water service reservoirs can be elevated or situated on a hillside on such a level
that sufficient pressure is generated in the distribution area. In these reservoirs, storage and
pressure head functions are combined.
 Pumped system: these have a low-level ground reservoir and the required pressure is
generated by pumps. Water only enters the storage vessel when the pressure in the network
increases above the height of the tank. When demand for water increases water flows from the
tank to supplement the volume supplied by the pump.

The steps for designing a water distribution system generally are:


 Choosing the preliminary source scheme and type of network;
 Division of the distribution area into districts;
 Estimation of the population of each district;
 Calculation of the water demand for each district at the nodal point;
 Calculation of the required pipe diameter.

Two main types of distribution networks are:

1. Branched distribution
Branched networks are predominantly used for small capacity water supplies delivering water mostly
through standpipes. Their drawbacks are lower reliability (a single failure can cause an interruption of
supply to all customers), increased danger of contamination, possibility of sediment accumulation in
dead-ends, larger pipes are often required than in looped systems to overcome friction losses.
Furthermore, a fluctuation of water demand can cause large pressure variations in the systems. Their
advantages are that they are cheaper and easier to design and install and flow direction and rates can
be easily determined for all pipes. Fire hydrants shall be installed at dead-ends of the pipe for the
purpose of flushing.

2. Looped distribution
Looped distribution networks allow for the supply of customers from more than one direction making
them less prone to overall failure of the supply. They have the advantage of better hydraulic
performance which leads to smaller pipe sizes and the reduced possibility of water supply interruption
during maintenance activities.

6.10.1 Pipe size


To determine the pipe size, Hardy Cross Method with empirical equations are used. For quick and
precise calculations, recent software shall be used.

When designing a pipeline network, it should be ensured that there is sufficient pressure at the point of
supply to provide an adequate flow to all customers. If available, network models of the system should
be used to check that all pipes will be operating to the required standard.

To maintain water quality, it is important to minimize transit times and avoid stagnation and low flow
rates. Therefore:
 The system should not have excessive capacity unless this is required to meet a known increase
in future demand;

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 139 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 Ideally low-flow dead-ends and loops should be avoided. Situations that may give rise to
negative pressures should always be avoided as in the event of a pipe failure contaminated
water can be sucked into the pipe.
The recommended diameters for distribution system are from DN 100 to DN 400, unless otherwise
specified.

6.10.2 Pressure

In a distribution system water should be supplied at adequate pressure and flow. However, pressure is
lost by the action of friction at the pipe wall and in pipe line components such as valves. The amount of
pressure loss is also dependent on the water demand from customers, pipe material, length, gradient
and diameter.

To deliver sufficient quantities of water, the pressure head in the network should be at least 1.5 bar (15
mwc, worst point peak day, peak hour) in all parts of the network, including the remotest and highest
points. The maximum pressure should not exceed 6.0 bar (60 mwc).

In high rise buildings, a booster pump, supplied from a ground tank / reservoir, can be installed by the
consumer to ensure sufficient water pressure provided this pump is supplied from a storage tank and
not connected directly to the distribution pipeline.

If the pressure is excessive, the consumer can install a pressure reducer.

Pressure variations can be reduced by installing pipe of larger diameters, although the cost is higher.

If gravity is insufficient to supply water at an adequate pressure, then pumps need to be installed to
boost the pressure. Pumps can be either permanently operational or triggered to start when pressure
falls and stop when it increases.

6.10.3 Methods of supplying potable water


6.10.3.1 Metered house connections
A house connection distributes the water to individual consumers through a pipe connected to the
distribution network.

The connection to the water distribution pipeline is through a tapping saddle (electro-fusion for PE100
pipes or mechanical for others) to a valve adjacent to a water meter, generally installed on the wall of
each property. The material for house connections is PE 100 SDR 11 which has a pressure rating of 16
bars.

A water meter (see water meter section below) is installed together with a strainer on the wall of each
property. The meter should be installed at a sufficient height (approximately 1.5 m) to allow ease of
reading and fitted with a ¼’’ turn lockable ball valve installed before the strainer.
The approved meter is provided by Diam.

Further information regarding the sizing of connections and meters are given in the procedure
TET/PRO/5000 and regarding a typical house connection in procedure TET/MS/5001.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 140 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
6.10.3.2 Tanker distribution
Water is made available at tanker points from where it is distributed to the individual customer using
mobile tankers and pumped to the customers roof tanks.

Tanker Filling Station (TFS) is provided to supply potable water to remote dwelling areas where water
cannot be supplied through distribution network as laying of distribution network is not feasible. Besides,
TFS can be provided in addition to the reticulated distribution network in order to distribute water during
an emergency situation like pipe burst or planned shutdown.
6.10.3.3 TFS location
TFS Location shall be determined strategically considering the following:
 Easily accessible to nearest service road/rural road;
 Centre and proximity to supply points;
 Vicinity to existing electrical power supply;
 Closer to the distribution network/reservoir;
 Min. 200 m apart from the residential plot and 500 m away from public amenities viz.,
school/Park/Mosque/Eid prayer area;
 Provision to gravitate the spilled water to existing wadi/low level that will not flood to the adjacent
area.

The following factors should be considered for the design of a tanker filling station:
 Minimum filling capacity of 40 m3 in 30 minutes;
 Minimum 2 bays serving each 1 tanker at a time;
 During tanker filling, network pressure should not drop below 1.5 bar;
 Number of bays shall be decided according to the requirement of the area;
 Each filling station should have the capability to fill both small and big tankers;
 A vending machine shall be installed on each bay to account for the water taken;
 For small regions individual tanker filling points shall have an individual storage tank at a suitable
height to comply with the above conditions;
 If the flow is not sufficient to refill the tank quickly after emptying, a booster pump shall be
installed to fill the storage tank within 1 hour.

Furthermore, each station is to be developed with adequate drainage, and paved entrance / exit.
Standing for tankers whilst filling or when parked shall be paved.

A flow meter shall be installed on the inlet of all tanker filling stations. Valves are to be placed so that
each filling bay is independent and can be isolated without shutting down any other bays.

Each station shall be equipped with an automatic prepaid card system for filling. The vending machine
will be equipped with a system to efficiently monitor all tankers. Each tanker will have a smart card
(electronic) to control its rotations and volume of water transported.

The following components are essential in a TFS:

a) Control Panel
b) One control panel fully automated for each TFS;
c) The unit shall be suitable for the climatic conditions in Oman;

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 141 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
d) The panel shall be equipped an identification system (magnetic key or card system) with
a digital screen. The identification system shall be waterproof, secured and impossible
to forge. All the information shall be readable in both English and Arabic languages;
e) The panel shall be in a metallic panel closed by a lock near the delivery point with sun
protection;
f) The panel shall work on a power supply of 230 V, 50 Hz, 1 phase;
g) The panel will monitor the tankers through identification system to control the quantity of
water delivered by tanker;
h) Filling operation for each filling point shall be started by push button operation (from the
control panel). The push button shall open an electrically operated valve which shall
allow the water to flow towards the filling point;
i) The system shall have a button (above mentioned) to choose the bay where the water
will be delivered. Each bay shall have a number (1, 2, 3, etc.) which will be clearly visible;
j) The control panel must be installed in a safe and secured location, to avoid any damage,
but still has to be accessible for the users.

b) Control Unit
a) The unit will deliver only the allotted quantity of water authorized by the system. After
each filling the information (volumes) will be updated in the control unit and in the regional
SCADA.
b) Display access of the control unit can be secured by password for each tanker, each
contract.
c) The control panel shall be self-powered during 4 hours.
d) The control unit shall be able to send alarms by SMS to Diam technicians’ mobile phones.
e) The control units shall be the same for each TFS control panel, and shall be in modular
conception and upgradable.
f) Control units shall be able to communicate with other devices: PLCs, controllers, smart
sensors and other units for the needs of process controls.
g) The language program shall be standard. The units shall be parameterized with no
specific language.
h) A connection on the local unit with a laptop shall be anticipated and allow an intervention
in the program.

c) Data transmission
The data transmission shall be achieved with the following functions:

a) The data shall be sent to the Regional Control Room through GPRS or GSM data, in
accordance to available signal on site. As an option, optical fiber medium could be
proposed if available on site.
b) In case of data transmission or SCADA breakout, the Control Unit shall be able to store all data
during 15 days.

d) Water delivery point (bay)


The delivery point shall have the following functions:
a) The start button shall open an electrically operated valve which shall allow water to flow
towards the filling point.
b) An emergency button is to be installed to stop the delivery point.
c) An electrically operated valve with low power (24 V or 48 V) shall be installed at each
bay. The valve shall be in normally closed position in case of power failure.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 142 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
d) The required volume of water shall be recorded automatically by opening the valve and
shall be measured by a water meter which shall gradually start the valve closure when
the selected volume is close to be reached and shut it off completely after the required
volume has been supplied.

e) Data report to control room


a) The following shall must be sent on daily basis (once in a day at 00:00) to the main
regional control room:
i. Total volume delivered by tankers per day
ii. Volume delivered by each tanker (name, tanker number registration plate, contracted
quantity, date)

b) The following alarms shall be sent to the regional control room:


i. Low level of water reservoirs
ii. Low low level of water reservoir
iii. High level of water reservoir
iv. High high level of water reservoir
v. Intrusion water reservoir
vi. Pressure alarm
vii. Water delivery failure to tanker
viii. Power failure
ix. Electro-valve failure
x. Water meter failure
xi. Report failure
xii. Communication failure
xiii. Electrical Valve failure
xiv. Identification failure
c) Each filling station shall have its SCADA backup (historic, curves), with a local
connection with a laptop.
d) The monthly reports must be automatically generated by the system last day of the
month at 00:00.
e) The SCADA report shall contain the following information:
i. Daily water delivery in each TFS
ii. Monthly water delivery in each TFS
iii. The total water delivered from the beginning of the year (from 1st January)
iv. Monthly quantity delivered by each contract with its number (Contractor and contract
number)
v. Annual report for water delivered in each TFS
vi. Annual report for water delivered by each contractor
vii. Annual report for water delivered by tankers per Governorate
f) 3 years data must be available all the time.
g) A consumption graph must be provided for each TFS
h) The SCADA system must be able to print the report of all activated alarms
i) The remote management system which will be installed in each regional main control
room shall reflect the following requirements:
i. Remote Management master station running on a Microsoft Windows PC-compatible
microcomputer Multimedia graphical displays, Curves.
ii. Fully integrated management of Excel (text or chart reports),
iii. The communication interface shall also be by Web server and SMS

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 143 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
iv. Data presentation can be customized by Diam,
v. Fully secured data base and confidential access the data with different access levels
and passwords.

6.10.4 Water flowmeters


A water flowmeter is a device that records the volume of water passing through a particular point in the
global water system, example: pumping station, reservoir, consumer connection.

The function of the flowmeter is:


 Accurately record volume of water passing appoint in the network;
 Accurately record with the customer's consumption;
 Provide an index as a basis for calculating the consumption billed to the customer;
 Allow the recording of flow rates being distributed;
 Assessment of network efficiency.

The general specifications required for water meter are:


 Recording accuracy even under low flow conditions;
 Resistance to available water pressures and pressure variations;
 Cause minimum pressure loss;
 Retain its operating and accuracy characteristics over time (sustainability);
 Withstands the conditions of the environment (resistance, inviolability);
 Be easily readable;
 Does not alter the quality of the water;
 When necessary to allow the calculation of rates of flow passing through the meter.

There are four main types of meters, which are:


 Mechanical meters of the volumetric type;
 Turbine type;
 Electromagnetic meters;
 Ultrasonic meters.

Currently Diam follows the type of flowmeters as shown in Table 6.2.

Table 6.2. Type of flowmeters.

Flowmeter size (mm) Technology used


Less than 40 Volumetric flowmeter
40 to less than 150 Single jet type
150 and above Electromagnetic

There are also meters with automatic and remote meter reading devices. Water meters shall conform
to ISO 4064 standard and OIML R 49.

Domestic meters are to be installed vertically, on the outside of the property wall without any protection
installed at 1.5 m above ground level.

6.10.5 Leakage and wastage control


The main factors of difference between the total water input to the system and that is consumed are:

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 144 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 Leakage in reservoir and water pipelines;
 Leakage in network pipes;
 Unduly high pressures in distribution systems intensifying leakage and bursts.

The following methods of leakage control are in use:

 District metering
Flow meters are installed at strategic points within the system compromising areas of 500 to
2500 connections.

There are different reasons for dividing network into zones. One is to have a greater control over the
distribution of water through monitoring the volume of water entering into an area. A network can be
divided in to District Metered Areas (DMA) for network assessment and control purposes. Other benefits
from Water Quality point of view are:
 In case of contamination, it is easier to identify the source of the contamination quickly,
 Zoning reduces the extent and complexity of mixing water.

For the follow up of a network, a flow meter should be installed to measure the inlet and outlet from a
strategic point of the distribution network. This enables continuous network performance assessment,
which enables the identification of changes in network efficiency and thus triggering field investigation
exercises.

The following factors should be considered for the installation of a district meter:

 Numbers of connections (domestic + commercial) should be between 500 and 2500;


 Minimum inlet and outlet points,
 Handover network pressure test if taking over a private network;
 Maximum inlet diameter = 300 mm,
 Electromagnetic flowmeter + pressure linked via telemetry to access flow and pressure data
remotely,
 Minimum cascading network,
 Number of boundary valves < 5.

 Field Investigations
These are normally triggered by the network efficiency decreasing below the target level. This
decrease could be caused by opening of a boundary valve, new connections, leaks or burst.

 Passive System Detection


This uses the public and meter readers to report leaks, illegal connections, leaking fire hydrants
etc.

 Pressure control
Reducing the system pressures to the minimum level reduces the force behind leaks and
extends the working life of the network due to the reduced stress placed on the network. Ways
to accomplish pressure reduction are reducing pumping heads and the use of pressure reducing
valves.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 145 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
In order to monitor the pressure in the network, pressure monitoring points should be located at the
following points within a DMA:

 Inlet point of the DMA (within same chamber as flowmeter);


 Internal pressure points at the average point, located according to the area’s geographical and
network’s pipeline hydraulic analysis.

Specification of pressure transducer is given in the Standard Specifications.

 Water quality monitoring point


In order to asses and monitor the water quality, a sampling point should be installed at the inlet of DMA.
The sampling point should be installed as per the standard drawing TET/SD/5016.

6.11 SCADA

The following represents the basic minimum which should be monitored/collected in the SCADA system
and shall be transferred to the Regional Control Room:
 Pressure at valves (data + alarms);
 Position and operating of electrical actuated valves;
 Flowmeters DMA (data + alarms);
 Water quality analyzers for strategic points at long distances (data + alarms)
 Historic data.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 146 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
CHAPTER 7 CATHODIC PROTECTION

Chapter 7 describes cathodic protection for transmission pipeline requirements to fulfill intended

quality for a water supply system. The guideline shows the general design requirements for two

methods of cathodic protection: sacrificial (temporary during construction period) and impressed

current (permanent) that are intended to enhance life-time and performance.

This chapter is a standalone chapter and shall be read in line with the requirements of other chapters within this

document “Integrated Water Supply System” as well as with the other publications by Diam e.g. manuals, standard

specifications and drawings.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 147 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
7.1 Introduction

This document has been prepared as a Guide for Diam engineers and their Consultants with regards
to Design and engineering activities for Cathodic Protection (CP) System for buried water pipeline. This
guide covers the requirement of the system using impressed current anodes.

The CP system design expert is advised to visit the site in order to acquaint himself with all the
necessary information such as soil conditions, transportation facilities, data of similar pipelines and
underground cables & cable trench/corridor in the adjacent pipe corridor, electrical transmission line or
other pipeline interferences, etc. for proper design and execution of the work. Ignorance of the site
conditions will not be accepted as a basis of claim for any compensation whatsoever.

7.2 Cathodic Protection System

CP is a technique for protecting metal structures, such as pipelines, from electrolytic corrosion by
making the structure the cathode in a cell, either by applying an electromotive force directly or by putting
it into contact with a more electropositive metal.

7.2.1 Methods of applying CP

Cathodic protection may be achieved in either of two ways - by the use of an impressed current from
an electrical source, or by the use of sacrificial anodes (galvanic action).
7.2.1.1 Sacrificial anodes
Sacrificial anode systems employ reactive metals as auxiliary anodes that are directly electrically
connected to the steel to be protected. Electrons are supplied to the steel pipe, via the electrical
connection, and a corresponding amount of anode material goes into solution as metal ions, according
to the laws of electrolysis. Some anode material is lost by self-corrosion, and the anodes are not
converted to electrical energy with 100% efficiency. Zinc, aluminum and magnesium are the metals
commonly used for sacrificial cathodic protection.

As magnesium is more reactive, it shall be used in high resistive medium such as soil and water.
However, zinc and aluminum anodes can be used in low resistive medium like sea water. The choice
of sacrificial anodes for the cathodic protection depends upon the soil resistivity values. If this value is
within 1000 Ohms-cm, Zinc anodes will be used and if the value is between 1000-7500 Ohms-cm, Mg
anodes will be used.
7.2.1.2 Impressed current
The buried pipe receives current from a DC power source via an auxiliary insert electrode buried in the
ground. The pipe becomes the cathode and the auxiliary electrode the anode. The auxiliary electrode
sometimes consists of scrap iron. In this case, the iron will dissolve from the anode by reaction and the
electrode is described as a consumable anode. If the anode is a noble metal or an electrochemically
insert material, the surrounding environment will be oxidized.

7.2.2 Sacrificial (Galvanic) anodes CP


As per the soil resistivity report, if the soil in the pipe invert is found to be corrosive, then it is required to
design a temporally cathodic protection using galvanic (sacrificial) anodes. The system should be
installed and operational immediately upon backfilling. This system is required to maintain for the

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 148 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
duration of lying of pipes or until the new impressed current cathodic protection (ICCP) systems is
commissioned or whichever is encountered first.

Each CP system consists of following components:


 Alloys of magnesium in the form of cylindrical rod, which is enclosed in a canister having coke
breeze, can be used as sacrificial anode.
 1 No. anode junction box per CP station.
 Galvanic anode cables shall be connected to the pipeline via terminations made in the junction
box. Shunts can be corporate in each junction box to measure the current.
 Cables shall be colour coded as Red for anode cables (including from sacrificial anodes), Green
for reference cells and Black for all other cables (test cables, bonds, etc.).

It is necessary to distribute the number of anodes along the length or over the pipeline structure to be
protected as this is generally limited to the small areas of protection.

Metallurgical testing and physical inspection of cast anodes, anode identification and documentation
shall be carried out in accordance with NACE SP0387.

7.2.3 Impressed current CP


The permanent ICCP system for the buried pipelines is preferred. The following minimum requirements
shall be adopted:
- Transformer/ Rectifier stations supplying the protective current.
- Impressed current anodes (tubular) in sheet steel canister filled with petroleum coke breeze,
backfill materials, etc.
- 1 No. anode junction box per CP Station.
- Single core, stranded copper conductor, PVC insulated, overall FRLS (Fire Retardant Low
Smoke) PVC sheathed armoured cable required for connection between anode and junction
box.
- Single core of required cross-section stranded copper conductor, PVC insulated, overall FRLS
PVC sheathed armoured cable for connection from T/R unit to junction box and pipeline.
- Two core of required cross-section stranded copper conductor, PVC insulated, overall FRLS
PVC sheathed armoured power cable for power connection from power supply source to T/R
unit.
- Required thermite weld cartridges complete with mould and all accessories of cathodic
measurement bonding cables with pipeline and welding of the same with the pipeline.
- Pure epoxy encapsulation of the anodes cable connections to pipeline.
- All civil, structural and electrical materials required for installation of CP system.
- All materials required for laying and termination of cables including cable trays, GI conduits,
lugs, glands, markers, grounding material, etc.
- Required numbers of resistance bonding with test stations at power line crossing as and where
required.
- Required grounding cells and Kirk cells.
- Required for isolating the cathodic protected piping system from the piping systems/ equipment/
structure/ facilities that are not cathodic protected.
- Required numbers of permanent reference cells.
- Complete permanent (for 30 years) protection of casing and carrier pipelines using additional
anodes at each encased pipe crossing.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 149 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
- Two sets of portable instruments and accessories required to monitor the performance of CP
system such as corrosion voltmeters, multi-meters, Megger, portable reference cells, electrodes
etc.
- Outdoor type test stations along the pipe routing at intervals not exceeding 1000 meters and at
locations of each of the Wadi/oil and gas pipeline crossings as well as Electric Railway crossing.
- Required number of test stations shall be provided for the ICCP system for monitoring and
testing.
- In Impressed current system, the protective current required shall be supplied by transformer
rectifier (T/R) units connected to the electrical main supply and fed into the pipeline by buried
impressed current anodes.
- The transformer rectifier units shall be the source of power for the ICCP system. The output of
T/R unit shall be automatically varied to achieve the setting of pipeline to soil potential.
- Suitable measures as per international practice will be taken to mitigate any interference current
and cross currents from any source.
- Special protection shall be provided at encased-crossing (Road/ Wadi/ Electric Railway
crossing). Additional permanent sacrificial anodes for casings/carrier pipes within casings shall
be provided.
- CP stations shall be provided by a specialist as per the calculation required for the attenuation
of pipelines.
- The type of anode and anode bed for the ICCP System shall be in conformance with BS EN
13636 and BS EN 15112.

7.3 General Requirements

Under the Cathodic Protection system, the following various systems and equipment’s shall be covered:
 Complete soil resistivity survey for the pipelines along the entire buried pipe lengths, one test
per 500 m.
 Detailed design as per the design data, standards and codes of practices specified and the
approved soil data.
 Carrying out detailed engineering and get approval from Diam and their representative.
 Complete manufacture; including shop fabrication, assembly, and testing and inspection at
manufacturer’s works.
 Supervision, erection and commissioning, including but not limited to fabrication and/ or pre-
assembly, if any, civil works, testing and putting into satisfactory operation of all the equipment/
system and handing over to Diam and successful completion of initial operation.
 Conducting Functional Guarantee tests after successful completion of initial operation.
 Submission of all the design drawings, design calculations, technical data sheets, “As Built”
drawings, manufacture and assembling practices, construction/ installation practices, test
procedures followed during manufacturing, erection and commissioning, Performance &
Guarantee testing, carrying out monitoring services etc., and submitting Operation &
Maintenance manuals for Diam representative for approval and records.
 The list of recommended O&M spares (optional) for trouble free operation for 5 and 10 years for
the complete cathodic protection system.
 Monitoring services for the complete CP system and its equipment for one (1) year from the
date of completion of guarantee tests.
 All other materials which may be necessary but not mentioned herein specifically to complete
the CP system in all respects to the best engineering practices.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 150 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
7.4 Basic Design Data/ Guidelines

The data of pipelines to be protected and wrapping and type of coating employed for the protected
pipelines are varies from project to project, this information shall be got from respective project
specification.

All cathodic protection systems design should be in line with government renewable energy policy. The
consultant should explore all possible ways to utilization solar power. The design should envisage that
usage of solar power should be maxim and dependency of grid should be zero. The system design
enables utilization of solar power to maximize the use of their generated electricity and minimize energy
purchased from the utility by fully utilizing energy storage.
The consultant should design a cathodic protection system by impressed current supplied with solar
energy panels applied to a pipeline. Sufficient number of solar panel and minimum 2 day back up battery
should be considered in the system design. All PV system diagnostics and alarms should send to
SCADA.

The cathodic protection system will be sized in order to guarantee, at each point of same system, the
minimum pipe-to-soil potential value of (-) 0.95 V versus Cu/CuSO4 half-cell reference electrode. The
maximum negative potential value allowable at the drainage point will be (-) 1.2 V (as per BS EN
13636 and BS EN 15112).

Overall, design pipeline coating efficiency shall be considered as not more than 70% througho ut the
design pipeline of 30 years for design of ICCP system.

The design current protection density shall not be less than 0.5 mA/Sqm and 20% design current is to
be kept as provision for redundancy.

The design anode consumption rate shall not be less than 0.4 kg/Amp/year for high silicon chromium
iron anode.

The rating of transformer rectifier shall be considered for an additional requirement of 25% power
compared with the power required under normal operating condition.

Detailed design calculations for the design of the entire system to be submitted to Diam for approval.

As part of corrosion survey, full particulars regarding secondary structure including power cables,
communication lines, oil/gas lines etc. which would adversely influence the system or would be
influenced by the system must be collected. The CP system would incorporate suitable mitigation
measures for varying types of soil and moisture content.

Cathodic protected section of the pipeline shall be electrically isolated by use of insulating joints.

The pipes in the cased crossings with seals shall be protected by sacrificial anodes. The anodes
shall be in the form of ribbon or arc shaped rod and would be welded to the carrier pipe by thermite
welding as close to the carrier pipe as practically possible. The length of the ribbon anode would be
equal to the length of the carrier pipe inside the casing and anodes will be mounted over the
circumference in such a way that it is distributed equally at 120° angle between them.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 151 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
The external of casings would be coated in the same manner as carrier pipes and also provided with
anodes on both sides of the pipe.

As a part of CP monitoring, potential measuring devices would be installed at all test stations. The
test station would also provide the flexibility for connecting and disconnecting sacrificial anodes. Some
of the test stations having potential measuring terminals shall also have terminal facilities for measuring
line currents.

7.4.1 Test station


Test stations along the pipeline shall be provided along the pipe corridor for monitoring the
performance of cathodic protection system and bonding of pipe lines in common pipe trench at
intervals not exceeding 1000 meters. Test stations shall have, besides pipe-to-soil potential
measurement and bonding facilities, four terminal facilities for line current measurement.

In addition, measurement station shall also be provided at following locations:


 At both sides of wadi crossing (major and active), major road crossings, other pipeline crossings
owned by others; like oil and gas.
 At all insulating joints. The test station shall have terminal facility for connection of grounding
cell to pipeline. Besides terminals shall also be provided for pipe-to-soil potential measurement
on both shoulders of joint.
 At crossing of AC/DC electric traction system.
 At vulnerable location with drastic change in soil resistivity.
 At high tension (HT) overhead line crossings and selected locations where HT line passes close
to pipeline.
 In vicinity of DC networks or grounding system where interference problem is suspected.
 At valve location.
 At crossing of other foreign pipe lines (bonding facility with resistor shall be provided).

Additional test stations described above, many of which shall fall intermediate between potential test-
cum-bond stations, shall have binding facilities. Some of these additional test stations meant for a
single pipe or such additional test stations may coincide with those test stations located at 1000
meters interval.
Test stations at location of insulating joints shall be installed independently. Details of terminal
facilities and connection schemes for individual type of test station/ current measuring station/ test-
cum-bond station shall be as per relevant standards.

The location of all the test stations shall be marked with their connection schemes and other relevant
information. A test station schedule shall also be prepared.

Potential test-cum-bond station provided at regular interval as a means to bond, monitor and control
current flow in structures laid in common pipe corridor/trench. These potential test-cum-bond stations
shall allow detection and mitigation of any interference on foreign structures that may result from
operation of this CP system.

7.4.2 Reference electrodes


Reference electrodes shall be provided to:

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 152 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 Obtain the most reliable indication of the protection and system behaviour.
 Ascertain the effectiveness of each CP station and control their output.
 For separate control, reference electrode including one standby should be placed on all the
individual pipelines.
 High purity copper/ copper sulphate and silver/ silver chloride reference electrodes shall be
used to provide stable potential measurement references.
 For each automatically controlled CP system, monitoring reference electrodes shall be
supervised by a duplicate electrode in its close vicinity in an approved location.
 Such duplicate electrodes shall be provided to guard against reference cell failure
possibilities in an unattended automatic system. Facilities shall be provided to reject spurious
signal during open or short circuiting of monitoring point.
 30% spare reference electrode complete with accessories shall be provided. Number and
type of electrodes to be supplied by CP specialist shall be approved by Diam representative.

7.5 Functional Guarantee


The functional guarantee should be given as elaborated below:
1. The system shall be guaranteed that the performance/ function of the CP system installed is
strictly in accordance with and conforming to the codes specified and shall perform the
specified duties as per following:
 (-)0.85 V Pipe-to-Soil Potential (P-S-P) with respect to Copper-Copper Sulphate half
cell (reference) electrode in absence of an anaerobic bacteria and (-)0.95 V in presence
of an aerobic bacteria (both with the CP system switched ‘on’).
 A minimum negative (Cathodic) voltage shift of 300 mV produced by the application of
protective current.
 A minimum negative (Cathodic) polarization voltage shift of 100 mV measured between
the structure surface and stable reference electrode contacting the electrolyte.
 A net protective current flow from the electrolyte into the structure surface as measured
by an earth current technique applied to predetermined current discharge (anodic) points
of the structure.
2. If the CP expert fails to prove the functional guarantee of the CP system as set forth in the
specification, the main contractor/JV shall investigate the causes and provide free of cost to
Diam to rectify/ replace the detects within a reasonable period to prove the guarantees.
3. If the system fails to prove the guarantee within a reasonable period, Diam shall have the option
to take over the equipment and rectify the same to fulfil the guarantee and/ or to make necessary
additions to make up the deficiency at the Contractor’s risk and cost. All expenditure incurred
by Diam in this regard shall be to Contractor’s account.

7.6 Documentation
The following minimum design documentation [not essentially limited to these only] shall be furnished
by the CP specialist (for review and approval):
 Corrosion survey report with interpretation.
 Basic design package and system optimisation studies.
 Quality plans for all equipment/ items.
 Detail engineering and final design report.
 Key diagrams of each discrete systems and complete CP system.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 153 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 Anode installation drawings representing all variations in type, environment, depth, placement,
supports, etc. including anode.
 Cable layout schedules and terminals.
 Foundation, weather protection cover details and support details for T/R sets, anodes, test
Station, distribution boxes and cables of all description.
 Design package on T/R sets essentially incorporating circuit diagrams, fabrications and
installation details, parts list, description on operation and maintenance.
 Design package on anodes essential incorporating composition, fabrication and installation
details.
 Design and drawings that may be required for mitigation purposes.
 Complete CP system layout drawings for each CP station.
 Method statement of thermal /CAD Welding for the cable connection to the pipelines utilizing
pin bracing and sealing methods of weld joints.
 Calculation of attenuation of potential along pipelines and test post schedules.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 154 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
CHAPTER 8 PIPELINE INTRUSION, LEAK DETECTION AND LOCATING
SYSTEM USING FIBER OPTIC CABLES

Chapter 8 describes the use of fiber optic cables to detect pipeline intrusion and leak in

transmission pipeline to fulfill intended quality for a water supply system. The guideline shows the

general design requirements for a system that is supposed to utilize the existing fiber optical cables

owned and laid by Diam.

This chapter is a standalone chapter and shall be read in line with the requirements of other chapters within this

document “Integrated Water Supply System” as well as with the other publications by Diam e.g. manuals, standard

specifications and drawings.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 155 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
8.1 Introduction
This document has been prepared as a Guide for Diam Engineers and their Consultants concerning
the outline of design of leak detection system including pinpointing its location and identification of
pipe intrusion as well for water transmission pipelines.
Water Transmission Pipelines are at risk from external threats including third-party intrusion, and
ground movement in addition to the ongoing potential for leaks due to corrosion or other causes.
Although the appropriate use of internal inspection practices and regular survey of coating and
cathodic protection systems will give timely information on any deterioration in pipeline condition,
external threats can be unpredictable.

To overcome these risks, an intelligent pipeline monitoring system has to be envisaged at the
Regional SCADA Control Centre. Diam’s fibre optic cable (FOC) can be use as intrinsic sensor or
extrinsic sensor along the transmission pipeline. Using FOC as intrinsic sensor can measures:
i. Strain
ii. Temperature
iii. Pressure

Moreover, using FOC as extrinsic sensor can measures:


i. Vibration
ii. Rotation
iii. Displacement
iv. Velocity
v. Acceleration
vi. Torque
vii. Temperature

FOC can provide continuous, simultaneous distributed measurements of the above parameters for
the detection, monitoring, and location of events including:
• Third-party intrusion
• Leaks and pilferages
• Geo hazardous activity (optional)

The system shall use this proven technology so that an unprecedented detection range of about
100 km is possible without the need for any power along the pipeline. A system can thus, monitor
200 km of pipeline when configured to monitor 100 km upstream and downstream from a single
location.
The following primary elements to be considered:
 Documentation (engineering design, construction drawings, as-built drawings, test and
commissioning procedures, systems documentation);
 Installation methods and procedures;
 Necessary spares and consumables for commissioning and start up;
 Recommended spare parts and consumables for normal operations of minimum two
years after successful handover;
 Special tools and test equipment;

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 156 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 Test and commissioning (include Factory Acceptance test, Site Acceptance test and
Commissioning);
 Client personnel training;
 All equipment shall be labelled and tagged using suitable permanent labels.

8.2 General Requirements


This specification details the requirement for a complete system to provide continuous monitoring
of any kind of intrusion, leak detection and locating system in transmission pipelines.
The system shall be based on the fibre optic distributed sensing solution. The system shall use a
free dedicated single mode optical fibre within the existing FOC, which is laid by Diam. Single or a
pair of optical cores shall be utilized for both Pipeline Intrusion Detection (PID) and Leak Detection
& locating System (LDS) in the transmission pipeline.
The system shall utilise a standard and proven technology, which will avoid the use of remote pulse
stimulation or in field optical amplifiers to achieve the required monitoring lengths.
The purpose of the PID / LDS is to detect, locate and classify unauthorized third-party intrusion,
leak detection and scrapper monitoring throughout the pipe route. All events are to be identified
automatically for the operator via a dedicated control panel and SCADA connectivity.
Events to be classified are:
 Third-Party Intrusion
- Manual excavation using hand tools
- Machine excavation
- Unauthorized movements of vehicles

 Non-specific activity alerts


- Geo and Seismic Activity
- Scrapper, location and speed
- Valve Detection

 Leak location and detection using following modes;


- Distributed Acoustic Sensing
- Distributed Temperature Sensing
- Distributed Strain Sensing

The PID / LDS classification engine should be capable of distinguishing between personnel, digging
(manual and mechanical), vehicle, drilling, scrapper movement and seismic activities. The system
shall be capable of being configured with zones to distinguish between areas of interest in order
configure differing alarm parameters based on the threat profile and the environmental conditions.
The system shall also be capable of differing alarm parameters based on time of day.
The PID / LDS shall be integrated into regional SCADA systems via specified API’s, OPC, Contact
Relays, XML or any open standard protocol. Integrated security systems, may include CCTV,
thermal imaging cameras, access control, etc. The PID / LDS shall provide coordinates or positional
information to prompt the above third-party equipment.
The PID / LDS should have a fully distributed architecture to provide a failure tolerant, fully
distributed database and configuration management system. Distributed architecture shall consist
of distributed Processor Units each capable of being accessed through multiple Control Unit HMI’s.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 157 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Each Control Unit HMI shall be capable of accessing all Processing Units. In the event of an
Interrogator Unit or Processor Unit failure, only that segment shall be affected. In the event of a
Control Unit HMI failure, data shall be accessible by all other networked Control Unit HMI’s. No
Master Controllers shall be required. No Client-Server architecture or single point of failure shall be
allowed. However, it is advised to propose an optimized configuration suitable for the concerned
project, which will be reviewed and approved.
As an option, the PID / LDS shall also be capable of connectivity to mobile devices (smart phones
and/or tablets) via SMS or XML connectivity over Wi-Fi or GSM modems.
It is recommended that the FOC are laid close to the transmission pipelines with an average
distance of 250 mm from the surface of the main pipeline according to TET/SD/5019.

8.2.1 PID / LDS system


The proposed PID / LDS shall include the following components:
 Interrogator Units (IU’s) located at remote PS or reservoir and shall continually scan
the Telecommunications ITU-T G652/G655 fibre. IU’s are to be single channel only for
increased signal quality. Multiplexing will not be permitted as this reduces frequency
ranges and provides dead zones in time.

 Simplex Processor Units (PU) or Redundant Processor Units can be located at the PS,
reservoir, wells, or TFS location and at the Control Room locations with a gigabit
network backbone.

 Ethernet Controlled Power Supplies shall be provided at IU and PU locations for remote
power management.

 Control Units (CU’s) shall be located at the Control Room location.

 Control Units shall provide user access to data and act as HMI/Operator Workstations.

 Latest, high availability, server shall be provided to ensure networked time


synchronization.

 The PID / LDS shall have a level of redundancy that ensures that a single point of
failure makes the total system inoperable.

 User Interface Software shall be installed at required locations such as PS, reservoirs
and only if required at wells and TFS locations. This shall be the responsibility to the
system manufacturer and the system shall be configured to dynamically display the
alarms, events and IU locations on a map overlay, preferably on the GIS platform or
google map. The User Interface Software shall, also, provide additional analysis of
historical data, frequency and other standard requirement for detailed pre and post
analysis.

8.2.2 PID/LDS technology


 The PID / LDS shall utilise conventional telecommunications single mode fibre optic
cable as the sensing element. Installation of the equipment should be accomplished
without interruption or modification to existing services that utilise the cable.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 158 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 The PID / LDS shall utilise coherent optical time domain reflectometry (C-OTDR) to
reconstruct the triggered signals present at many thousands of discrete locations (max
spatial resolution of 250 mm) along the sensing cable from the inherent backscatter
from a pulse of transmitted light. The backscattered light signal will be modulated by
the local conditions thus allowing the triggered signals to be reconstituted from the
observed backscatter light signal.

 The PID / LDS shall be impervious to linear variation along the length of the sensor
(strong signals near the sensor do not prevent distant quiet signals further along the
sensor from being received), impervious to external jamming or interference from
electromagnetic radiation and intrinsically safe involving no active electronics or
electrical signal.

 The system should be designed with interrogators placed at optimal locations on a


single fibre optic cable at suitable junction points and be networked together creating
the ability to monitor extremely long linear assets from a single remote location.

 A highly sophisticated acoustic processing technology which can analyse thousands of


acoustic signals in parallel and in real time providing an automated means of detecting,
classifying and localising specific acoustic events shall be utilised. The system shall
then send alerts to the designated operator(s) to the presence of specific activity taking
place at any monitored point along the transmission pipe line. Live acoustic feedback
should allow the identified activity to be listened to in real time.

8.2.3 PID / LDS sensing cables


The PID / LDS shall utilise conventional single mode telecommunications FOC as the sensing
element. The single mode optical fibre is existing and is compliant to ITU-T G652. The cable
will combine telecommunications and sensing fibres within the same structure.

8.2.4 Integrator unit


Each IU should be capable of monitoring up to a minimum of 100 km or beyond of optical fibre
from a single location. A discrete IU shall be provided for each section of fibre to be monitored.
The IU should be a hermetically sealed and installed in standard rackmount (3U/19”) enclosure
which incorporates all required sensing optics. The IU shall be able to monitor a minimum of
the intended acquired data through the FOC.

8.2.5 Processor unit


Each IU shall be provided with either a single Processor Unit (Simplex PU) or a Double
Processor Unit (Redundant/Dual PU) per two IU’s, if located in the same position. The PU shall
be a rack mountable multiple core computer running a software that is capable to integrate
with other systems used in water supply network and providing as well great stability and speed
of recovery from power failure. The PU shall carry out the server and control functions, such
as system initialization, system access and data flow in a standalone deployment. Each PU
shall contain a large capacity storage drive (store data for six months) for data recording and
report generating purposes. PU’s or DPU’s can be located remotely and communicate with IU
over dedicated gigabit backbone or locally to IU’s.

8.2.6 CONTROL UNIT


The CU’s shall be identical in fit and compatible to the PU, and acts as a system server which
controls system initialisation, system access and data flow. The CU’s shall be located at

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 159 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
optimized locations along the transmission pipeline. These locations have to be identified by
the specialised vendor in co-ordination with the design consultant/ EPC contractor/ Diam.

8.3 Leak Detection Technology


 Distributed Temperature Gradient Sensing (DTGS): as the water leakage interacts or
comes in the vicinity of the cable, the minute (small) and the fractional change in
temperature (Deg. C) will modulate the backscatter signal which can be interpreted.
Subsequently, the system shall measure this change in temperature which has to be
interpreted.

 Orifice Noise (OFN): the outflow of water leaking from an orifice (created by the leak in
the transmission pipeline) will generate an acoustic signature that shall be measured.

 Strain (Ground Heave): the release of water will cause a localised strain component on
the fibre affecting the backscatter signature. In small water leaks this will be realised in
parallel with the DTGS component and may be very small.

8.4 Data Recording


8.4.1 Digital recorder
The system should have a digital recorder with temporal resolution of 300 seconds, but in case
of abnormality it shall record every 1 second, that automatically records the data providing
rapid reacquisition of stored data. The data should include:
 Sensor data
 Histogram data
 Alert logging
 System (activity) logging
The standard digital rolling recorder should provide a minimum of 45 days of Histogram
recorded data and 3 days of decimated Sensor Data (which should allow full aural replay).
In case of data storage challenges, spatial and temporal resolutions can be discussed during
the design period with Diam representatives.

8.4.2 Manual recording


In addition to the data stored by the Rolling Recorder, snapshots of engineer specified data
from a specific IU (or all IUs) should be recorded for historical offline analysis and review:
 Histogram / Waterfall data – user selected, allows interactive replay of recorded activity

 Sensor data – user selected, allows replay for analysis of recorded activity.

8.5 System Integration


The PID / LDS should be proven to operate with the Genetec Command 7 Control system
allowing the alert system to be coupled to external cameras delivering an immediate “eyes on”
where camera coverage is provided.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 160 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
8.5.1 Mobile communications
This system has to be included and proposed as an option.
A mobile communications modem (latest version, e.g. 5G) can be supplied. Alert information
(including location, time, etc.) and system alerts shall be capable of being forwarded to
specified mobile phones / smart phones in a format compatible with immediate access to
mapping products/applications. This application should be configured to send either alert
information and/or system alerts, during specific allocated time periods to different allocated
system users depending on the customers’ requirements.

8.5.2 Dry contacts


The PID / LDS shall be pre-configured to trigger “dry contacts” received from all other
connected systems along the transmission pipeline on pre-set conditions, for example, when
an external alarm is raised by another connected system it will be displayed on the display
until the alarm is acknowledged by an operator.

8.5.3 SCADA/PLC inter-operability


The complete PID / LDS equipment has to be an independent system as it may not need any
information or data from the main SCADA.
Additionally, the PID / LDS should be able to output OPC (Object linking and embedding for
Process Control) messages and shall be provided with an OPC license to allow connection of
system outputs to OPC compliant SCADA / DCS systems.

8.6 System Software Alert Modules


The PID / LDS system shall be capable of providing various alarm types and algorithms. These
shall be capable of being configured in different colors on SCADA based on the level of states.
Green, Amber and Red alert states. Alerts should be configured to be individually operational
within any specific zones or geographical areas created by the user. The following alarm types
should be available.
Manual Digging or Intrusion Detector
Alerts to track the presence of manual digging within the audible range of the fibre. In addition,
the module should, also, feature positive and negative detections against distributed activity
(e.g. cattle) and period activity (e.g. pumps).
Mechanical Digging Detector
The mechanical or mechanized digging detection should feature the ability to link detections
to the presence of vehicle engines giving unambiguous detection of excavators, etc.
Pipeline Activity Detector
This detector shall alert on persistent presence of static or slowly moving heavy machinery. It
should continue to generate alerts through any digging activity. The scope of the minimum
alert level (i.e. vehicle size) and time span for presence to be considered a threat shall be
configurable. The detector shall respond to vehicles approaching from any direction to the pipe
then commencing work as well as static vehicles suddenly coming to life.
Vehicle Detector
System shall be alert on real time basis and track the presence of any vehicle in the vicinity of
the fibre either moving perpendicular or parallel to the fibre. The effective range for the vehicle

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 161 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
detector shall be configurable according to the user’s requirements. The facility to record and
identify the repeatability of vehicle shall be included as an optional feature.
Activity Detector around the pipeline vicinity
This detector should alert to the presence of any kind of disturbance created above the level
of the measured background activity (normal activity). This system should have the facility to
configure the trigger level of the sensitivity above the normal disturbances and define it as
source of disturbance thereby creating a library of disturbances.
Personnel Detector
System shall alert to and track the presence of footsteps in the vicinity of the fibre, either
moving perpendicularly or parallel to the fibre. The detector shall be configured for effective
range, footfall spacing and a time span for continued presence of footfalls according to the
user’s requirements.
Scrapper Tracker (Optional)
This optional facility, the Scrapper Tracker, shall detect and track Pipeline Inspection Gauges
(PIG), if used, during cleaning and inspection. The Scraper Tracker shall determine location
and speed of PIG. However, this module shall be proposed only as optional feature.

8.7 Software Modules


 All the software on the PID / LDS shall be accessed from the System Toolbar, launched
as a result of starting the application on the CU.

 Map Display - central graphical interface: situational display supporting a google type
map or schematic, graphical alerts, alert lists and controls for installation modification.

 Report Generator – there should be 2 variations of the report generator that can be
launched from the map display – a geographic based search tool and a parametric
based search tool allowing rapid recall (and where data exists, replay) of stored alert
data.

 Surveillance Waterfall Display – central acoustic interface displaying acoustic activity


for a single IU operating length together with historic “waterfall” of recent activity.

 Alert List – a tabular, user configurable, more detailed list of current alerts, duplicating
the alert list in the map display but with further detail.

 Audio Controls – Selection of control elements for the system audio output.

 Record – shall allow creation of data recordings for offline replay and analysis.

 Analysis – Detailed acoustic analysis of a single channel time series, Fast Fourier
Transform (FFT) and Spectrogram (Spectral Waterfall).

 Alert Control – Switching of detectors status (on / off) throughout deployment and within
specific zones.

 Condition Monitoring – Shall open the control window for management of condition
monitoring functions within specific zones.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 162 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 Profile Control – Shall allow different users to load a range of self-created profiles whilst
operating under a single user log in. This should be used for different analyses states
or purely for personal preferences.

 System Manager – User and Engineering tool allowing inspection of remote machine
states, performance and error inspection.

Figure 8.1. Typical configuration of the monitoring station.

NOTE: This is only a typical configuration of the MONITORING STATION and is provided as
a guideline only. The contractor shall propose the detailed configuration of proven technology
and system.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 163 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Figure 8.2. A typical configuration of PID/LDS system.

Note: Block valve stations can be FM / MOV / FCV chambers with RTU. These may also
be connected with IUs, if demanded for PID / LDS system and has to be proposed by the
supplier with justification.

8.8 User Level Access


The system shall offer three different levels of security for operational (User), supervisory
(Administrator) and Managerial (Engineer), thereby providing pre-defined and controlled
various access privileges.
 User – Regular day to day user of system – should require mainly access to alarms
and tools for inspection and prosecution. Should be unable to turn off operational
elements. Able to configure the user interface, turn on/off alerts within zones.

 Administrator – The administrator level account, able to modify system settings in a


recoverable manner. Observational interface to detector settings (used for regular
system exercise tests).

 Engineer – Full systems access for setup purposes.

8.9 Web Services


The system shall be capable of posting data to an intranet or internet Webserver for remote
viewing and reporting of data. The Web Services module shall be accessible via PC and mobile
devices (smart phones & tablets). Web Services must be SECURED and shall provide various
reporting methodologies including time plots, alert plots, report roses and historical data views.
Necessary firewall has to be provided.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 164 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
8.10 System Control & Feedback
The proposed PID / LDS software will automatically connect to the pre-programmed IU and
maintain a system heartbeat visible on screen. The proposed system will visually alert the user
if any system errors are observed within the software and PU or within the IU. Detailed alert
information should be analysed if prompted. Lower level warnings are logged but not displayed
on screen.
 The proposed system should visually report the recording/live status of the system and
any associated IU.

 The proposed system should visually and audibly report on the presence of any alerts
within the selected alert field.

 The proposed system should allow for users to select the waterfall and histogram from
the specific IU either manually or automatically from the geographic location on the
map display.

 The proposed system should allow users to select the specific IU and specific channel
detailed analysis either directly or from the waterfall display, control which alert types
are to be reported and from within which zone these should be active and select a
specific channel for the audio output from the map display or waterfall display.

8.11 PID / LDS Performance Criteria


 The PID / LDS shall protect the pipeline route, and the right of way, in the specified
sections and it shall be able to demonstrate the compliance to these Minimum
Performance Requirements.

 The PID / LDS shall be able to detect, as well, large scale events to an accuracy of
about +/-5 meters. A large-scale event is defined as manual digging with a pick or
shovel within a lateral distance of 5-10 meters from the fibre optic cable. These system
requirements shall be considered mandatory.

 The PID / LDS shall be able, by a combination of event programming, Acoustic Finger
Printing and by configuration settings, chosen during commissioning, achieve a high
detection rate for all events likely to present a threat to the pipeline operation.

 The performance objective of the PID / LDS during the installation process should
include the commissioning procedures to both maximise the detection of specific
events (e.g. manual digging) whilst at the same time ensuring that general background
noise will not by chance create an alarm situation. The large dynamic range of the PID
/ LDS together with a multi variable alert process and Acoustic Finger Printing should
ensure that the system can operate in extreme situations.

 The proposed PID / LDS system shall be able to display multiple alarms
simultaneously. The response time for a single event shall be dependent on the type
of signal processing involved.

 The proposed PID / LDS shall be able to recognize different types of Third-party
Interference (TPI) and advise the pipeline security operator about the nature of the
alarm event.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 165 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 Alerts shall be prioritized based on location, type and duration as red, Amber and green
Alerts. These alerts may be time dependent and configurable into zones to match the
geography and topology of the pipeline and its environment.

8.12 Licenses
 The Vendor shall provide all software licenses, whether temporary or permanent,
required for the development, review (by Client or Contractor), engineering,
commissioning, operation and maintenance/modification of the PID / LDS. These
licenses shall be provided regardless of location of the project activity as required by
the project implementation strategy and plan.

 Each license shall be capable of being upgraded with respect to capability (e.g. adding
new function block features) and capacity (e.g. increasing point count) without
requiring, or causing, system shutdown or process interruption.

 Vendor must arrange to have the system software upgrades installed whenever
released.

8.13 Inspection and Testing


 Inspection

The vendor/supplier shall provide well in advance, the list of personnel / engineers who
will be required to visit the Diam sites for inspection & testing. Upon approval, the listed
personnel / engineers shall be permitted free access during the approved duration.
 Test Strategy

The PID / LDS shall be subjected to a comprehensive and systematic hierarchy of tests
commencing with internal tests performed by the vendor to verify that all components
have been developed according to vendor’s own QA/QC standards and compliant with
the applicable project specifications. A report shall be submitted to the client showing
the outcome and system performance. Thereafter, extensive modular acceptance tests
will enable each component to be successively integrated leading to the performance
of a fully integrated factory and site acceptance tests.
 The PID / LDS testing strategy shall be based on the following guiding principles:

- Internal tests must be performed to ensure quality, correct functionality and to verify
the associated documentation.

- Utilisation of advanced simulation tools shall be maximised to deliver robust,


dynamically tested PID / LDS functionality.

- All parties contributing to the PID / LDS testing programme shall provide detailed input
to an overall comprehensive and integrated schedule and provide the resources to
support it.

- Shortcuts that reduce testing scope shall not be permitted as mitigations against
schedule pressures.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 166 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
- All tests shall be fully documented to provide comprehensive test records and audit
trail.

 Testing Documentation

There shall be a comprehensive set of procedures to support and control the work
processes, which are necessary to ensure efficient execution of the testing. The
procedures required as a minimum are as follows:
- Project specific test procedures (for all formal tests).

- Software revision control procedure.

- System change management procedure.

All test procedures shall be submitted to Client for approval prior to commencement of
Vendor’s internal tests. Test shall not proceed without client’s approved test
procedures. Vendor shall not proceed on the basis on using generic procedures / check
sheets unless specifically agreed with contractor and client that they will deliver 100%
PID / LDS testing.

8.14 Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT)


 The Vendor shall be responsible for maintaining detailed test records for any inspection
or test carried out by themselves or third parties, presence of client is not mandatory.
The results of all tests are to be recorded in a form of an inspection certificate, copies
of which will be supplied to the Client. The test schedule shall also contain details of all
procedures to be used in the equipment testing.
 The FAT shall in no way release the Vendor from his contractual responsibilities as to
materials, workmanship, performance and conformance to the specification of the
equipment. The following activities shall be carried out as part of the FAT only where
the tests have not already previously been completed:
o Equipment specified in the engineering documents is present for inspection.
o PID / LDS identification and labelling are correct.
o Good presentation of equipment.
o Verification of physical interconnections between systems.
o Communication checks between systems.
o Verification of data transfer between applications.
o Redundancy checks (if appropriate).
o Functional checks of data interfaces between LDS and systems supplied by
others.
o Failure mode performance tests.
o System backup and restore, including disaster recovery.
o All hardware settings and addressing (e.g. network switches) are configured
and correct.
o Demonstration of all system functions of equipment and engineered systems
supplied by the Vendor.
o Complete system re-loads.
o Power failures and re-starts.
o All possible “What if?” situations to be listed, simulated and tested.
o Verification of data collector functionality and ability to download data to LDS.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 167 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
o Database verification and application software function tests.
o Earthing checks.

8.15 Site Acceptance Tests (SAT)


 The Vendor shall perform SAT to confirm that the PID / LDS has been shipped without
damage, correctly installed, and operates reliably to specification in its final
environment. This includes verifying the safe installation and connection of the
contractor’s power supplies and earthing.

 The Vendor shall develop SAT procedures which clearly identify the objectives of
testing and contain test pre-requisites, test scripts, programme procedures for fault
rectification and the means for documenting the tests. These procedures shall be
submitted for Diam approval prior to commencement of the individual SATs.

 Using the approved test procedures, Vendor shall complete an internal SAT then
provide the respective signed off test records for review prior to commencement of the
SAT by Diam. The SAT shall include a listing of any component failures during the test
and specific details. Vendor shall provide details of their typical SAT procedures for
inclusion in the functional design specification (FDS).

 It may be necessary to perform specific outstanding LDS tests that can only be
achieved at site due to logistics; however, reliance on site testing alone shall be
avoided, wherever possible.

8.16 Installation
 Client will develop a delivery and installation plan in association with the Vendor and
installation Contractor. This plan shall be circulated and discussed by all relevant
parties prior to delivery of the PID / LDS to site.

 Upon delivery and installation of the system, Vendor shall carry out a pre-power up
inspection of the equipment to ensure it is complete, there has been no damage caused
in shipping and all specified safety protective systems are in place and functional.

 The PID / LDS installation shall be in two parts; Initial Operating Capability and Final
Operating Capability.

8.17 Operating Capability

8.17.1 Pre-operating capability


 All equipment shall be installed and pre-configured as per the agreed Functional
Design Specification. The installed fibre shall be pre-calibrated at suitable access
points governed by the local terrain, environment conditions and expected variation in
routing or burial environment. Both acoustic and positional calibration shall take place
simultaneously.

 Post calibration, a minimum of four test zones shall be defined that will be used for
detailed system tuning.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 168 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
8.17.2 Final operating capability
 Further system tuning shall be conducted to maximize the effectiveness of the system
over the network achieving an optimum probability of detection / false alarm ratio in
light of environmental conditions outside the SAT test zones and/or further
analysis/refinement of customer requirement.

 The pre- & post-tuning programme of system shall comprise of two discrete activities:
o Remote analysis of system statistics by Vendor / Diam.
o In field system modification and tuning by Vendor.
 The final tuning shall follow the programme below, which shall commence at the
completion of SAT:

o Week 1-2: System stores alert data, Diam make notes on alert volumes / correct
detections / nuisance alarms / missed alarms – supported by a Diam run
programme of documented random testing.
o Week 3: Vendor off site team shall analyze the statistics, make
recommendations on tuning modifications, test those against recordings held
from SAT for continued positive detection, make online changes (where
available) or direct Diam administrator.
o Week 6: Contractor shall conduct Statistical & Alert analysis of preceding 2
weeks.
o Week 7: Vendor shall return to site for a set of additional tests / support / online
tuning.
o Week 10: Diam shall conduct further Statistical & Alert analysis of preceding 2
weeks.
o Week 11: Vendor shall conduct online changes to system along with Diam
directed input.
o Week 13: Diam shall conduct further Statistical & Alert analysis of preceding 2
weeks.
o Week 14: Vendor shall return to site for a set of additional tests/ support/ online
tuning, final handover and any additional support required.
o Vendor shall provide any special tools required for PID / LDS installation and
commissioning.

8.18 Commissioning
 Vendor shall provide competent engineering support services to assist Diam and
Contractors during PID / LDS installation, commissioning and start-up at the production
facilities.

 Vendor shall be required to support Diam and Contractor by preparing detailed PID /
LDS commissioning procedures, together with detailed plans covering all site-based
activities necessary to fully commission the PID / LDS. These procedures and plans
shall be prepared and issued to Diam / Contractors for review and approval, prior to
the commencement of PID / LDS commissioning activities.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 169 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
8.19 Training
 Training of this complete system must be provided by the Contractor/Vendor at the
vendors workshop to the nominated engineers, at-least two engineers each from Diam
Projects and Operations.

 Training of the complete system must comprise of following sections so as to impart to


trainees.
o Full knowledge of Hardware and software details.
o Detailed methodology of installation of system.
o Configuration and setting methods.
o Creating PID & LDS zones.
o Appending of new PID & LDS zones.
o Real-time and Historical archiving of activities.
o Simulation of system (PID & LDS).
o Hard & soft copies for analysis.
o Data storage and retrieval methods.
o Import & Export of data from other projects.
o Linking and Integration to other FO transmission system.
o Any other related activity.
 Vendor / Contractor has to testify the level of training and issue certificate to those
trainees who have successfully qualified as authorized personnel / engineers to handle
PID / LDS system.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 170 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
CHAPTER 9 DISINFECTION

Chapter 9 describes the requirements for disinfection using chlorination of potable water within

storage tanks, transmission and distribution pipelines to fulfill intended quality for a water supply

system. The guideline shows the general design requirements for the disinfection system and

chlorine residual that is intended to ensure delivery of water within the designed parameters.

This chapter is a standalone chapter and shall be read in line with the requirements of other chapters within this

document “Integrated Water Supply System” as well as with the other publications by Diam e.g. manuals, standard

specifications and drawings.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 171 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
9.1 Chlorine Disinfection
Diam recommends using sodium hypochlorite solution or calcium hypochlorite granules and on-site
chlorine generators for the purpose of chlorine disinfection (On site Electro Chlorination – OSE) of water
in transmission and distribution. All chemicals, reagents and internal coatings for piping shall be certified
for drinking water applications by an internationally recognized institute for regulating potable water
quality; e.g. NFS, etc.

All chlorine added to drinking water must meet American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ formerly
the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) standards 60: Drinking Water Chemicals—Health Effects
covers water treatment chemicals.

World Health Organization (WHO) have set a provisional guideline value for bromate of 0.01 mg/l.
Bromate is introduced to drinking water as byproduct of:
 Presence of bromide in commercially produced sodium hypochlorite;
 Bromide in the salt used for electrolysis to produce hypochlorite.
Hence, the detail design engineer shall specify required stringent standards for chemicals and required
process for converting bromine to bromide.

Since Chlorine is a powerful oxidant, it will react with some elements and it will also have a biocide
action. The two main forms of chlorine are the free chlorine and the combined chlorine.

- Free chlorine will be divided, after dissociation in the water, into 3 different types of chlorine
(dichlore, hypochlorous acid, hypochlorite ion), with a different level of biocide action efficiency
for each type, depending on pH values.
- Combined chlorine will be combined with some oxidable element and will not have any biocide
action.

It can be noted from Figure 9.1 that at pH = 7.5, HClO and ClO- concentration are close to 50%. The
most efficient disinfectant form is the hypochlorous acid (HClO). The best range of pH for a good
disinfection will be between 6.5 and 7.5.

Figure 9.1. Dissociation


1. Dissociation ofofhypochlorous
hypochlorousacid
acidin
inthe
thewater.
water.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 172 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
High temperatures will favour the bactericide effect, although low temperatures favour HClO against
ClO-, high temperatures will speed up the disinfection reaction. However, one major drawback is that
high temperatures decrease the reagent stability in time, and therefore its efficiency.

9.2 Secondary Chlorination Requirements

9.2.1 Water quality standard and risks


Water quality standards:
The current Omani un-bottled drinking water standards 8 specify a free chlorine concentration range of
0.2 - 0.5 mg/l as an acceptable range for drinking water through public distribution systems. This
standard is currently use to monitor compliance at all points from treatment plant outlet to customer’s
tap within Diam perimeter of operation.

Risks:
It is frequent and common to have long lengths of pipes for transmission & distribution between storage
sites and customers. The residual chlorine (RCl) may decayed and read to zero well before the
distribution ends without any post chlorination facilities, increasing the risk of water quality degradation.
Thus, depending on the network configuration, it may be necessary to proceed to boost the chlorination
by designing satellite chlorination units in strategic points as required. Therefore, the detail design
engineer shall follow the following guidelines:
 RCl level boosting in distribution networks where necessary to maintain above 0.2 ppm in the
lowest case.
 The design Engineer shall be responsible to produce network model in the distribution zones
for RCl lowest 0.2 ppm worst-case scenario, and not to exceed 0.5 ppm in upper-case.
 Upper-case scenario is peak hour flow in peak day of the year and worst case is lowest
elevation, sluggish flow condition in lowest demand hours and the days of the year.

The other factors that could be potential hazards in water quality are repairs in network and undetected
leaks in transmission & distribution networks as well as adding new assets to water supply system (e.g.
new reservoirs, elevated towers, distribution networks, etc.). Hence, strict disinfection procedures shall
be detailed in designing improvements or relaying of sections shall consider this effect.

9.2.1.1 Water supply systems, water age & transfer time


Three main configurations are mention in this guideline, depending on the type of asset:
 Post Chlorination on transmission lines (pumping stations or transmission reservoirs) and/or
service reservoirs;
 Distribution networks: satellite Chlorine booster stations in distribution network as per the detail
designers free chlorine decay models.
 Well water disinfection, straight after water abstraction from water tables.

9.2.1.2 Transmission systems


In transmission systems, location of the post chlorination units will depend on two main aspects:
 Water age and transfer time;
 Chlorine decay throughout the transmission (depending on both the pipe material and the
chlorine decay in the water due to initial concentration, temperature and organic matter content).

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 173 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Design of extension, expansion of transmissions in networks to existing distribution system requires a
field trails with laboratory tests and calibration of the distribution / transmission model. It shall be
performed and validated by the detail design engineer for chlorine decay time. A model shall be provided
in a separate chapter in the detail report with more accurate updated chlorine decay model and related
data for the entire transmission improvement.

9.2.1.3 Distribution networks


The distribution network residual chlorine decay model corresponding to a DMA are prone to run out of
residual chlorine standards causing poor water quality in certain branches due to:
 Poor branch velocities in off peak hours;
 Network Chorine decay time exceeds design;
 Under-utilized network;
 Operations of periodical flushing of distributing networks lines through washouts.

The network for a DMA related chlorine decay co-coefficient, wall reaction order and diffusivity are
required to submit in the detail design and model of the network for RCl levels contours, min & max
Chlorine decay kinetic factors shall be determined through laboratory tests and on-site sampling
campaigns.

The upgraded chlorine decay model for entire distribution networks results showing residual chlorine
(predicted for) below the required 0.2 ppm shall be highlighted. The detailed design shall cover for
chlorine boosting in strategic positions with satellite chlorine boosters so that the chlorine booster will
operate to maintain required chlorine levels based on the feedback from upstream RCl measurements.
Therefore, during network detail design, the engineer shall follow the following guidelines and further
applicable standards:
a) Expansion of distribution networks / adding new reservoir: the existing distribution network
updated with GIS shall be use in determining RCl (0.2 – 0.5 ppm) zones and off quality zones.
b) Identified zones, pipe network and nodes shall use method of optimizing (i.e. use of dynamic
programming) to identify satellite injection points.
c) Develop injection philosophy to optimize the desired RCl (min 0.2 ppm) in identified zones.
d) In case of direct injection to the transmission pipeline or distribution nodes, it shall be considered
to designing & using on line static mixers.

9.2.1.4 Wells
Most of Diam wells water is not disinfected and present a high risk of microbial contamination.
Groundwater may also contain more organics than water produced by desalination plants. Thus, special
attention shall be paid to the disinfection treatment, as there is a higher risk of generation of by-products
such as chloramine or trihalomethanes (THMs). Chlorine decay may be higher and risk of bacteria "re-
growth" also higher.

9.2.2 Disinfection System and Agents


Disinfection agents shall be in line with international regulations and recommendations published by
WHO (e.g. water safety in distribution systems; Bromide in drinking-water) and AWWA C651. Sodium
hypochlorite is preferred as it has less impact on water turbidity. However, other systems are preferred
for pre-commissioning disinfection and can be used, as well, in distribution systems to reduce the
CAPEX, OPEX and hauling risk from production site to injection point (small tanks).

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 174 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
9.2.2.1 Sodium Hypochlorite
Sodium hypochlorite, often referred to as liquid bleach, is the most widely used of the hypochlorite in
potable water treatment.
- Free chlorine rate: around 15%;
- Commercial liquid bleach is usually delivered at a concentration of 149 to 158 g Cl2/L.
- Bromide content shall not exceed internationally permissible limit by ANSI
9.2.2.2 Calcium Hypochlorite
Calcium hypochlorite is available on the market under different trade names, either in powder, granular
or agglomerated form. Its main characteristics are as follow:
- Free chlorine rate: up to 70%
- Purchased in 25 kg or 50 kg sealed containers
- Solubility: from 215 g/l at 0 °C to 234 g/l at 40 °C
- Working solution concentration generally lower than 100 g Ca(ClO)2 per liter
- Deterioration in time: 2 to 2.5% over 1 year against 4% for Sodium Hypochlorite
- Bromide content shall not exceed internationally permissible limit by ANSI
9.2.2.3 Sodium Dichloroisocyanurate (NaDCC)
NaDCC is the most recent product releasing chlorine. It presents some benefits (high stability under
high temperatures, higher free chlorine rate) compared with bleach and other products releasing free
chlorine. Like Calcium hypochlorite, NaDCC is available under different forms; powder, tablets, granular
or agglomerated.
- Solubility: 30 g/ 100 mL at 25 °C
- Free chlorine rate: around 90%
- Very stable and easy to use source of free chlorine
- Not toxic

For the three above solutions, the disinfectant agent after dissolution in water is injected according to
the following steps (shown in Figure 9.2); the water is stored in a bulk storage tank (1), collected by (2),
the level is checked through a level sensor (3) and the solution is pumped through (4) by the high
pressure pump (5). The water to be chlorinated arrives through the pipe (6) and the disinfectant agent
is injected with the hydro injector (7). The injection flow can be monitored and controlled automatically
by a flowmeter and an on-line analyzer, connected to SCADA system.

Figure 9.2. Schematic for liquid hypochlorite injection.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 175 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
9.2.2.4 Chlorine Dioxide
Chlorine dioxide (ClO2) is a yellow or orange gas also called biocide. This gas is not stable, and very
soluble in water. Its disinfection efficiency is generally higher than hypochlorite or chlorine gas and it
does not depend on pH range (5-10). However, due to its instability, this reagent must be produced on
site from sodium chlorite, chlorhydric acid and chlorine gas. The residual chlorine dioxide reacts with
PE100 and causes a rapid ageing of the pipe. Thus, ClO2 oxidizes the superficial layer of the pipe, and
creates small slots that tend to shorten the pipe lifespan. However, chlorine dioxide will not generate
hypobromous acid, hypobromite ion or bromate.

9.2.2.5 On-Site Electrolytic Chlorine Generation System (OSEC)


On site generation is recommended in locations where the hypochlorite demand is high. All other minute
demand booster stations can use the hypochlorite tablets with standard equipment required for sodium
hypochlorite dosing pump.
The detail design engineer shall give required specifications for the necessary equipment for safe
handling with piping arrangement include for flushing and cleaning.
The following are the main components for dosing equipment:
 Mixing tank – GRP;
 Mixer with controls in day tank;
 Dosing pumps (standby / duty);
 Dampers, calibration column and piping;
 HSE equipment and protectives measures.

Where the sodium hypochlorite is required at a higher demand it shall detailed for OSEC generation
units. These units shall not have exaggerated storing capacities. Storing capacity shall not be more than
21 days and shall be decided as per OEM guides.
Electro-chlorination enables to produce sodium hypochlorite continuously by using salt as a basic
component. The liquid sodium hypochlorite produced is less corrosive than bleach, and the low
concentrations enable a finer dosing of free chlorine into the water system.

9.3 Residual Chlorine Measurement and Monitoring

9.3.1 Regulation/control of dosage flow


Depending on the type of asset (well, pumping station, reservoir, etc.), the dosage flow is not controlled
in the same way. Basically, the injection is controlled by:
 Strength of the solution;
 Flow of the water to disinfect;
 Residual chlorine (RCl) concentration;
 Or both (flow and RCl) for more reactivity.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 176 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
The schematics below shown in Figure 9.3 and Figure 9.4 give an example of how the injection shall
be controlled for wells and pumping station or reservoir.

Cl2 Dose
Injection Cl2

Q2

Q1 FM

Figure 9.3. Schematic Chlorine dosing (wells).

9.3.1.1 Wells
The flow of the pump (Q2) injecting chlorine in the water system is only controlled by the upstream
total flow (Q1 measured by flowmeter FM) in the pipe. The dosing pump is working only if the well
pump is working.

Only > 48 hours of storage


capacity

Cl2 Dose Injection Cl2

Cl2 Analyzer Q2
Cl2 Analyzer

Reservoir or
FM
Q1 PS

Figure 9.4. Schematic Chlorine dosing (Reservoir/PS).

9.3.1.2 Reservoir or Pumping Stations


The flow of the pump (Q2) injecting chlorine in the system is monitored by both:
 The upstream flow (Q1)
 The upstream chlorine concentration
A chlorine analyzer shall be installed chlorine downstream the reservoir/pumping station, in order to
check the accuracy of the chlorine dosage.

9.3.1.3 Distribution Network


Network analysis for RCl decay against min / max flow actual & forecast for design horizon method of
injection;
Min/max, RCl in the node and dosage forecast, sizing equipment.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 177 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
9.3.1.4 Water sampling points
As per WHO guidelines for water sampling for RCl.

9.3.2 Type of measurement


Water Quality on-line analyzers are installed at different locations depending on the type of asset. The
analyzer shall be able to measure the pH and chlorine in each site.

In water industry, different technologies of analyses are found to titrate the different forms of chlorine.
DPD colorimetric detection is a method based on N, N-Diethyl-p-Phenylenediamine reaction with active
halogens. This reaction is a standard analytical approach for analysis of residual chlorine and other
chlorine oxidants and is based on the formation of colored products with DPD. This method which
require a physical sample to be taken is mainly used for on-site and laboratory testing.

9.3.2.1 On-line analyzers


Water Quality can be continuously monitored through on-line analyzers, the results data being
transferred to regional and national SCADA. The measuring chain for on-line analyzer which is shown
on Figure 9.5 has to be followed to validate the data. The design engineer shall specify the suitable
analyzers as per C&I guidelines. The designer shall specify the minimum distance between disinfectant
dosing point to the analyzer so as the minimum contact time (CT) is met, which is dependent on pipe
diameter, flow speed and CT required for that specific disinfectant. In order to eliminate false reading
due to air entrapped in pipeline, the detection prop of the analyzer shall be located in a position between
4 and 8 o’clock.

Calibration

Analytical DATA Analytical


Sample
Sampling Mesuring signal transfert to result
treatment
converstion SCADA Validation

Maintenance

On-line analyzer

Figure 9.5. Chain of custody for on-line analyzers.

9.3.2.2 Water quality sampling point


A sampling point is a fixed tap located on different types of assets owned by Diam (reservoir, pumping
station, TFS, water treatment plant & distribution network). At regular intervals, the samplers from the
Water Quality team of Diam collect samples, and a whole batch of parameters is tested in the laboratory.
The sampling points shall be as per the WHO guidelines. Diam guidelines and considering the criticality
of piping loops.

The respective standard designs for sampling points are:


 TET/SD/5016 Water Quality Sampling Point for Network;
 TET/SD/5017 Water Quality Sampling Point for vertical and horizontal pipe;
 WHO guidelines for distribution systems – latest version.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 178 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
9.4 Monitoring of Chlorine Levels and Alarms in SCADA
The SCADA system shall supervise, monitor and control the following parameters:
 Product tank: High, low levels
 Brine tank: High, low levels
 Production concentration
 Chlorine dosage
 Water flow
 Temperature
 Analyzer reading (treated water) - pH and Chlorine
 Other parameters recommended by the Manufacturer

All the analyzers shall be connected to the SCADA system. All this information shall be transferred to
Regional Control Room (RCR).

The Electro Chlorination system must be equipped with the OEM supplied dedicated PLC, with a panel
mounted HMI with fully independent operation in AUTO mode. This PLC should be further interfaced
over standard MODBUS with the Clients (Diam) PLC system, which is installed for process control at
well, pumping station, reservoir, DMAs, etc. Further, these data shall be archived by the SCADA at RCR
& NCC for remote Monitoring, Control, Reporting, Trending, Analyzing and MIS. Signal from local
electromagnetic flowmeter may be collected either from the transmitter directly (4-20 mA) can be taken
from the PLC for synchronized operation and dosing.

Prior to dispatch, a detailed FAT should be conducted at the OEMs workshop, witnessed by ICA
engineers from both Consultant & Client, who shall accord and provide approval to proceed with
shipment. An on-site training concerning its O&M also must be provided to the concerned engineers.

9.5 HSE Guidelines on Chlorination Units

9.5.1 HAZOP study


It is mandatory to submit an HAZOP study as a chapter of the detail design report by the design engineer
for:
a. OSG system;
b. Transporting, storing and dosing facility;
c. Sodium hypochlorite / Calcium hypochlorite tablets and dosing system.

Key information which may be required during the HAZOP should also be readily available. This could
include:
 Layout drawings;
 Hazardous area drawings;
 Safety data sheets;
 Relevant codes or standards;
 Plant operating manual (for an existing plant);
 Outline operating procedures (for a new plant);
 HAZOP metrics and mitigations.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 179 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
9.5.2 Risk assessment
On each new installation, in order to prevent injury, Diam requires the contractor, designer and all third
parties to assess the risk on site. Hazards and risks must be reduced to prevent harm to operators,
environment and property.
The following aspects shall be considered:
1. Follow guidelines of OHSE latest edition;
2. Design and build safe facilities for chlorine stores, equipment, disinfection system and
chemicals. As electro chlorination systems generate Hydrogen, ATEX directive covering the use
of equipment in a potentially explosive environment applies to the design of these systems.
ATEX requires that a zone is applied to any equipment and storage tanks which may contain
hydrogen. Within this zone, any electrical equipment must be suitably rated for use within a
potentially explosive atmosphere. In addition to these requirements, gas and explosivity
detectors shall be installed (existing or new projects). Regarding the retention zone, its volume
shall at least be the same as the product storage capacity. A high-level alarm shall be installed
in the retention location.

3. Set up procedures that can be handed over to the operators of the plant to ensure the correct
and safe systems of work are followed.

4. Design emergency plans and equipment that can deal with a spills, leaks or catastrophic failure
in the given area and surrounding if required

5. The designer or contractor must provide or make provision for the following for takeover by the
operational owners of the asset:
a. Servicing schedules for alarms, detectors, and other equipment designed for the security
of the chlorination unit;
b. Servicing schedules for the everyday use of equipment such as pumps, mixers,
processes, etc.;
c. Provide signage for the identification of the hazards, danger areas, prohibition,
mandatory and emergency as required;
d. Provide Information on good housekeeping, cleaning and maintenance regimes;
e. Provide emergency response programs in line with the system installed;
f. Provide training, information and instruction on the equipment the process used and the
substances under COSHH required;
g. Provide a list of the PPE and Specialist PPE required for the system installed;
h. Provide HSE manual for the installation.

Diam Health, Safety and Environment department has designed policies, process safe systems of
work, etc. that will accompany the end user of these systems and the contractor has to ensure all
HSE documents are implemented.
Two matrixes are given in Appendix. They give an overview, by type of installation, of the Personal
Protective Equipment and emergency equipment required on chlorination sites.

9.6 Documentation
The Consultant shall ensure that all documentation is included when a new chlorination system is
installed;
 Technical Designs

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 180 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
 Drawings
 Functional descriptions

The Consultant shall also hand over the following documents to Diam:
 Maintenance logbook (for analyzers & chlorination units);
 Preventive maintenance schedule and List of spare parts with frequency of replacement.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 181 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
CHAPTER 10 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

Chapter 10 describes the requirements of service connection of potable water to the customers

to fulfill intended quality for a water supply system. The guideline shows the general design

requirements for the fittings and accessories that is intended to ensure delivery of water within the

designed parameters.

This chapter is a standalone chapter and shall be read in line with the requirements of other chapters within this

document “Integrated Water Supply System” as well as with the other publications by Diam e.g. manuals, standard

specifications and drawings.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 182 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
10.1 Purpose
This document sets out procedures for the design and installation of service connections to all types of
premises. Its objective is to aid Diam authority staff to maintain a good standard of service connection
installations and to assist builders, developers, engineers, and architects in adopting approved service
layouts. Aspects of service connection installations including tapping from service main are included.
The regulations presented in this document form part of the requirements for water services connection
and installation. The purpose is to prevent misuse, waste, undue consumption or erroneous
measurement of water and most importantly to prevent leakage of drinking water.

The following should be followed, assist with the standardization of water service connection
procedures.

Materials and fittings used should comply with the relevant Diam standards /or British standard where
no Diam standard exists.

10.2 Scope and Application


This document shall apply to (i) a new water connection (ii) rearranging an existing connection,
including a meter installation, or for disconnection from Diam system; and (iii) the person, company
or organization, including water fittings manufacturers or suppliers/agents, engaged in any activities
relating to the supply, erection, maintenance and construction of water service connections.

This document covers that part of the water supply installation between a Diam’s system and a
customer’s installation, which generally consists of a service connection, water fittings, meter,
storage tanks, and single/multi metered Buildings. The scope does not include the water distribution
system belonging to Diam, except for the fittings that are required at the interface with Customers.

10.3 Definitions
All words and expressions shall have the meanings assigned to them at the beginning of this
integrated document.

10.4 Existing Arrangements


Any connection arrangement installed prior to the date of issue of this document shall not be
subjected to this Guide unless that arrangement contravenes material of construction, water leakage
or contamination requirements as given in the Regulations. A prior consent shall be granted by a
Diam before any additions or modifications to an existing connection arrangement are carried out.

10.5 Quality of Installations


Diam has an obligation to ensure that hygiene procedures related to the installation of water fittings
are followed during installation work, therefore request that individuals involved in such installation
work undergo a competency test prepared in accordance with its practices and standards in order
to ensure the quality of this work.

No person shall install a water fitting to convey or receive water supplied by the Diam, or alter,
disconnect. Only Diam approved fitting shall be used from ferrule connections until water storage
tank(s).

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 183 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
No person shall be allowed to install or permit to be connected a water fitting in a manner that causes
or permit to be connected or used, a water fitting which is damaged, worn or otherwise faulty so that
it; causes or is likely to cause, leakage, undue consumption, misuse or contamination of water
supplied by the Diam.

The applicant must ensure water fittings and storage tanks are inspected and maintained according
to the procedures set out in this Guide and the Code of Practice for the Inspection and Cleaning of
Customer Water Storage Tanks.

If during an inspection by Diam, it is found that a storage tank, including its water fittings, does not
comply with the Regulations, it shall be considered non-compliant, and an ‘Improvement Notice’ shall
be issued to the applicant. Failure to comply with such an Improvement Notice, or with any follow-
up inspection report or instructions from Diam, shall result in the applicant being issued with a final
notice, upon which the water supplied to the Premises shall be disconnected. Following compliance
by the applicant, and upon further inspection and approval by the Diam, the drinking-water supply
shall be reconnected to the Premises.

10.6 Service Pipe Location and Requirements


The followings to be adopted whilst laying service pipe connection
- Where possible, lay underground service pipes at right angles to the main and in
approximately straight lines to facilitate locations for repairs.
- Locate service within legal access to premises – avoid crossing land owned by others
private/public.
- Underground piping shall have a minimum cover as follows
 1.0 m under roads;
 0.6 m inside premises under paver block/roads
 0.3 m inside the building
- Service pipes must not run beneath the wall or foundations.
- In designing and planning the layout of pipework, attention should be given to the maximum
rate or discharge required, the economy of materials, accessibility, protection against
damage and corrosion, and avoidance of airlock.
- Changes in diameter and in direction should preferably be gradual rather than abrupt to avoid
undue loss of head.
- Where piping has to be laid in any ground/wall liable to subsidence then special consideration
should be given to the type of pipes and joints to be used in order to minimize the risk of
damage due to settlement. Where piping has to be laid across recently disturbed ground,
continuous longitudinal support should be provided and not merely supporting piers at
intervals.
- Ground tank inlet level at a height of one meter above the road level and more not more than
30 m distance (pipe length) from the Diam meter.
- Service pipe from water meter or ground/underground tank/sump shall be taken to roof
tank(s) through ducts and it shall be easily accessible for repair and replacement of
appurtenances.
- For single house connection, refer latest standard detail drawing “PAW/TET/SD/5021 titled
Typical house connection”. For multiple connections refer to drawing “PAW/TET/SD/5021-
B”, noted that the multiple connection drawing is applicable for grouping of water meters
installed either at ground level or terrace level.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 184 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
- All pipes and fittings installed for the potable water use shall be approved by the international
hygienic institutes like WRAS or NSF.

10.7 Ground Tank Storage – General Requirements

10.7.1 Tank placement and location


- The tank shall be located away from any source of pollution, particularly if it is buried in the
ground, and properly protected from ingress of foreign objects.

- The distance between the tank wall and any part of the wastewater drainage system shall
not be less than 3000 mm, in case unavailability of the distance then the wastewater drainage
system/pipe shall be protected in such a way that the pollution dispersion would not affect
water quality.

- Tanks in basements or contained in other belowground infrastructure must be located in such


a way that they are accessible for inspection, maintenance or replacement without the need
to disturb the associated infrastructure.

- The storage tank location must be positioned to avoid potential flooding.

- Storage tank access and inspection openings shall be at least 300mm above ground level or
the highest known flood level.

- Storage tanks used for industrial, livestock, agricultural and other purposes that may come
into contact with any other fluid or foreign material should be dedicated for that use only and
provided with suitable backflow prevention devices, overflow arrangements and an air gap of
not less than 50mm.

10.7.2 Fittings and accessories of the storage tank


- The maximum height of the inlet to the Premises’ Ground Storage Tanks shall not exceed
3000 mm from road level and or tank base shall not be more than 1000 mm from road level.

- Float-controlled valves or equivalent flow control inlet devices should be securely and rigidly
attached to the cistern or the tank and installed so that the valve closes when the level of the
water is not less than 25 mm and preferably not more than 50 mm below the overflow level
of the tank or roof tank.

- All inlets to storage tanks and roof tank should be provided with a Servicing Valve to facilitate
maintenance and a float-operated valve, or some other no less effective device, which is
capable of controlling the flow of water into the tanks. The Servicing Valve should be fitted
as close as is reasonably practicable to the float-controlled valve or another device.

- An alarm system, which is either audible or visual, shall be fixed in all


underground/aboveground and overhead tanks of capacity more than 10 m3.

- An overflow water pipe should not be connected to the drainage, it must be in a visible
location, where the discharge of water can be seen or noticed vividly.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 185 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
- All water pipelines (back and forth from the ground tank) should be open or installed in a
sleeve (pipe inside a pipe) to facilitate easy repairing or replacement in case of any water
leaks or damage of pipes.

10.8 One Connection Per Premise


The followings to be adopted

- There shall be one service pipe connection and meter for one consumer. If an existing service
pipe becomes inadequate to provide the required flow, it shall be closed and abandoned and
replaced by a new service.

- For large consumers such as Malls, Mass housings/hospitals, etc., where several
connections already exist, Diam shall negotiate with them to have one connection only.
Distribution within the property shall be the responsibility of the consumer. Except for one
connection, all existing connections shall be removed.

- Each consumer shall have a separate service pipe, where building subdivided into more than
one units, the property owner/developer shall install all necessary piping to allow separate
metering of each unit according to Diam requirements.

10.9 Water Meter Provision


- All potable water outlets supplying water to Customer Premises and connected directly or
indirectly to the water main, or sub-main of the Diam network, shall be metered in a manner
approved by the Diam using an approved measuring device.

- Any building, part of building or Premises divided into isolated flats (separate occupation)
shall be separately metered.

- Open commercial spaces with one or more self-contained units located separately shall also
be metered separately.

- Service or utility water requirements: air conditioning, housekeeping, garbage room, public
toilets, filtration system, and general services must all be metered by one or more meters as
approved by the Diam.

- Swimming pools (both above and below ground level) larger than 25 cubic meters with a
fixed water supply connection shall be metered separately. Similarly, separate meters shall
be installed on fixed water supply connections for any non-domestic use e.g. for cooling
systems. The size and type of meter shall be appropriate for the individual Customer’s overall
consumption pattern and maximum flow rates.

- Access to metering installations shall be made available to authorized officers of the Diam
for the purpose of meter reading, installation of a remote reading device, maintenance, etc.

10.10 Cross Connection Control


Adopt the following guidelines

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 186 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
- There shall be no interconnection or cross-connection between any pipe or fitting containing
Diam supplied water and a pipe or fitting containing water from any other source. The
provision of backflow preventer or closed and sealed stop-valves is not a permissible
substitute for the complete absence of connection.

- The design of pipework shall allow no possibility of backflow towards the source of supply
from any tank, whether by back-siphonage or otherwise. Valves cannot be relied on to
prevent such backflow.

- Where a supply of Diam water is required as an alternative or standby to a supply of water


from another source or is required to be mixed with the latter, it shall be delivered into a spate
tank by a pipe of fitting discharging into the air at a height above the top edge of the tank
equal to twice its nominal bore, and in no case less than 150 mm.

- All pipework shall be so designed, laid, fixed and maintained to be completely watertight,
thereby avoiding waste of water, damage to property and the risk of contamination of the
water conveyed.

- No piping shall be laid in or through any sewer or drain or any manhole connected therewith,
nor in a ground contaminated by sewage. Farmyards, animal pens, and cesspools should be
avoided.

10.11 Illegal Tapings


Illegal tapings such as direct tapping before water meter, installing direct pump before and
after the water meter, using of water before the tank for irrigation and car wash.

Figure 10.1. Illegal taping.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 187 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
Figure 10.2. Typical arrangement of piping from bulk meter to individual domestic meter.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 188 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
APPENDIX:
CHEMICAL AND CHLORINE GAS MATRIX FOR THE RECOMMENDED MINIMUM PPE IN LINE WITH THE VARIOUSE TYPES OF DISINFECTION OR POST DISINFECTION
UNITS

Table A.1. Personal Protective Equipment Matrix

Full (SCBA) Breathing Apparatus


Gas Monitor and Detector 4 Gas
PPE

CO2 and Oxygen Monitor single


Full Face Canister Mask

Chemical Over Suit

Long Rubber Boots


Half Canister mask

detector. (note 3)
Gloves Chemical

Boots Chemicals
Chemical Apron
Full EBA or BA

Gloves Work

Shoes Work
Face Shield

Boots Work
Dust mask
Bump cap

Ear Muffs
Ear plugs

Coveralls
Hard hat

Goggles

Glasses

Item

Sodium Hypochlorite          
Calcium Hypochlorite           
Bleaching Powder         
Electro Chlorination           

Notes:

1. This PPE Matrix is only a guide line, PPE listed is normal in the varying process range, but may change with technological advancements.
2. Prior to any user carrying out work with COSHH substances or disinfection processes, staff must carry out a full risk and COSHH assessment and where required make changes
as necessary. And in line with Manufactures Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
3. The following servicing guide should also be applied:
a. All gas monitors checked and recalibrated every 6 months unless single detector, then every two years and all cells replaced every two years.
b. Where required, all SCBA should be checked and inspected by the user prior to use and every 6 months by independent certified operative, further it should be refilled
after it drops below 30% of the cylinder capacity.
c. All PPE must be replaced when worn, torn, and damaged or if over exposed i.e. during a serious spillage, etc.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 189 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
APPENDIX:
CHEMICAL AND CHLORINE GAS MATRIX FOR THE RECOMENDED EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT IN LINE WITH THE VARIOUSE TYPES OF DISINFECTION OR POST
DISINFECTION UNITS
Table A.2. Emergency Equipment Matrix

Full (SCBA) Breathing Apparatus


Warning lights amber, red, green
Equipment

Gas Monitor and Detector 4 Gas

CO2 and Oxygen Monitor single


Emergency Spill Kit (Chemical)
Fitted Chlorine Gas Alarm and

Emergency telephone or radio


Chlorine Container Repair Kit

Fire Extinguisher Dry Powder


Portable Emergency Shower

PPE Welfare Changing Area

Occupational Health Checks


Fire Extinguisher Wet Chem
Fitted Scrubber System and

Emergency Spill Kit Oil and


Emergency Fire Alarm and
Fitted Chemical Detection

Fire Extinguisher Water

Fire Extinguisher Foam

Exposure Control Plan


Fire Extinguisher CO2

First Aid Equipment


Emergency Shower
containment area

detector. (note 3)
Equipment

Eye Wash
Petroleum
white etc.
detectors
Area
Detector

Training
Sodium
                
Hypochlorite
Calcium
                  
Hypochlorite
Bleaching Powder                  

Electro Chlorination                

COSHH Vehicle               

COSHH Store                

Note:
1. This matrix is only a guide and should be used in line with latest technologies and EU or BS standards on the storage, transport and use of chlorine gas, liquid or any of the other types of chlorine
producing equipment or process for disinfection designed in to process. Prior to designing, installing, building, operating and or maintenance of disinfection equipment and areas, a full risk assessment
should be carried out, and hazards and risks should be mitigated against as low as is reasonably practicable (ALARP) and all international guidance should be followed to achieve the highest level
affordable in the protection of the workforce the premises and the environment.

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 190 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001
This page is intentionally left blank

Version: 1.0, Issue Date: 31/05/2020


TET/DG/5000 Page 191 of 191
This is a Confidential Document. Its access is governed as per Procedure MS/PRO/9001

You might also like